Item 06 Suspension of Competitive Bidding, Contract Supplements and Budgetary Adjustments for the Martin Luther King Jr. (MLK) Library Renovation Project: (C15000840) (Two-Thirds Vote Required) [Published for 10-Day Review 1/23/2025] PART 3 — Sacramento City Council, February 4, 2025 (part 2 of 9)

B. Laminations shall be machine finished to a smooth surface, but not sanded, and to a uniform thickness with a maximum allowable variation of 1/64 inch. Warp, twist, or other characteristics which will prevent intimate contact of adjacent glued faces or interfere with uniform bending to a required curvature when under clamping pressure shall not be permitted.

Surfaces to be glued shall be clean and free from oil, dust and other foreign material which would be detrimental to satisfactory gluing.

C. Moisture content of lumber at time of gluing shall be not less than 7 percent nor more than 12 percent.

D. Slips, misses, and wane are not permitted.

Buehler Engineering
Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Bac
k Check Submission – November 01, 2024
Glued Laminated Construction SECTION 06 18 00-4
E. Boring of holes in members shall be in strict conformance with the Drawings. Notching is prohibited except where specifically detailed.

F. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.

G. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.

H. Fabricate member with camber built in.

I. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission.

J. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements.

K. Field cuts and holes in preservative treated members shall be preservative treated and sealed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect and verify that the installed work of all other trades is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Verify that specified items may be installed in accordance with the approved design.

C. In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed in discrepant areas until discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing items.

3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect work and materials of this Section prior to and during installation, and protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

B. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 ERECTION
A. Glued Laminated members are to be erected and installed in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Lift members using protective straps to prevent visible damage.

C. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated.

D. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured.

E. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, splicing, or other unauthorized modification.

F. Swab and seal the interior wood surfaces of field drilled holes in members with primer.

3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.

3.06 CLEANUP
A. Keep premises free from accumulated waste materials, rubbish and debris resulting from this work. Upon completion, remove tools, appliances, surplus materials, waste materials, rubbish, debris and accessory items used in or resulting from said Work, and legally dispose of off the site.

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Slatwall system
B. Wood trim at wall caps.

C. Wood veneer wall panels.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 4100 Architectural Woodwork: Casework.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.

2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.

3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.

4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.

5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data and samples for each type of finish required.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for each item of architectural woodwork. Indicate dimensions, details of construction, method of connection to adjacent construction, finishes, accessories, and hardware.

C. Samples: Submit the following:

1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.

2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI-certified compliance certificates.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-2

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator
Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate interior carpentry items similar to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

C. Forest Certification: Provide components made with all wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
D. NAAWS Quality Standard: Comply with the specified grade(s) of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, and installation, specified section(s), and applicable requirements of the current edition of the "North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 3.0, United States Version".

1. Provide WI-certified compliance labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-3
B. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP; graded in accordance with WI, veneer core material; type of glue recomme
nded for application, and containing no urea formaldehyde.

1. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of HPMA FE for hardwood plywood.

C. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

D. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard and manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry.

2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Clear /Grade A finish, kiln-dried, white maple finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color /and meeting NAAWS requirements for transparent finish.

B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades:

1. Grade D Select /1 Common /2 Common white woods; WWPA.

2. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA.

2.3 WOOD WALL CAPS
A. Base: Solid rift & Quartered White Oak.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

1. Where galvanized finish is indicated, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Anchors, Nails, and Screws: Select the material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled- in-place anchors.

C. Wood Putty: Standard industry grade for use in plugging fastener holes where required on Drawings, of color to match wood stain or finish; paintable where applicable.

D. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.

1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
b. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-4
E. Wood Filler: Synthetic wood filler, low-VOC and with no added urea formaldehyde, tinted to ma
tch surface finish color, sand to surface, finish, as manufactured by Abatron, Inc., Wood Tech, or accepted equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.

3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb.

Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.

4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.

Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.

B. Provide and install anchorage for all casework and shelving following manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.

1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.

2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-5

3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement
or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean all installed items of pencil or ink marks.

B. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Clear the work area of debris, using containers provided by the General Contractor.

D. Leave area of work broom clean.

E. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 06 2000
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000-6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4100-1
SECTION 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Stained wood veneer base and upper wall cabinets, tall cabinets, cubbies as indicated in Drawings.

B. Wood veneer panels.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 2000 Finish Carpentry: Finished wood carpentry trims.

B. Section 12 3640 Countertops: Quartz-surfacing countertops.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed surfaces include all surfaces visible when:

1. Drawers and opaque doors (if any) are closed.

2. Areas behind clear glass doors.

3. Bottoms of cabinets 42-inches or more above finished floor.

4. Top of cabinets below 78-inches above finished floor.

B. Semi-exposed surfaces include the following:

1. Open opaque doors or extended drawers.

2. Bottoms of cabinets that are more than 30-inches and less than 42-inches above finished floor.

C. Concealed surfaces include the following:

1. Surfaces not visible after installation.

2. Bottoms of cabinets less than 30-inches above finished floor.

3. Tops of cabinets over 78-inches above finish floor and not visible from an upper level.

4. Stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4100-2

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product
Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each item of architectural woodwork. Indicate dimensions, details of construction, finishes, and hardware.

1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches (300 by 600 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and edge condition, finished as specified.

2. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI-certified compliance certificates.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

1. Provide WI-certified compliance labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. Provide Seismic certificates indicating that casework is installed with all required wall blocking and that fastener size, frequency and locations requirements have been met.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Site Conditions" Article.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environment
al Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

C. Field Measurements: All casework dimensions shall be field verified prior to fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of NAAWS's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Hardwood and Softwood Lumber: Custom graded in accordance with NAAWS; average moisture content of 8 percent.

1. Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. For use at concealed areas only.

2. Species at Exposed Edges: Match face veneer with solid wood.

C. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPVA HP-1; veneer core material; type of glue recommended for application.

1. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: No urea formaldehyde.

2. Wood Veneer Species and Cut for Casework: White maple, vertical grain, slip match veneer leaves.

3. Face Grade: Grade A.

4. Thickness: 1/2-inch.

5. Veneer Core: 5-ply.

6. Back Grade: Minimum Grade 2.

D. Plywood Subtops for Countertops: Meeting APA requirements and the following:

1. Exposure: Exterior.

2. Thickness: 3/4-inch minimum.

3. Grade: APA A-A, EXT-APA, Group1, Marine.

4. Treat any exposed edges with exterior paint primer designed for use on plywood.

5. Paint any exposed surfaces as indicated in Section 09 9100.

E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

1. Acceptable Products: Roseburgs "Medite II" and Weyerhaeuser's "Premier Plus".

F. Thermoset Decorative Panels (Melamine): MDF as specified, finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

1. Provide polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges.

2. Color: White, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

G. Wall-Hung Countertop Supports: Cold rolled steel supports.

1. Angle Support Brackets:
a. Design: Straight gusset stiffener between support flanges of angle.

2. Floating Countertop Support Brackets:
a. Thickness: 1/2-inch.
b. Style: Flat angle.

H. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive; type recommended by veneer manufacturer to suit application.

I. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Fasteners, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.

2.2 CUSTOM CASEWORK FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPA
RATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Verify the adequacy and proper location of any required backing or support framing.

C. Verify that mechanical, electrical, plumbing and other building items affecting solid surfacing components are in place, complete and to receive the work of this Section.

D. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing material and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Provide and install anchorage for all casework and shelving following manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

D. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.

Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

E. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.

Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

3.3 CABINET INSTALLATION
A. Install woodwork to comply with NAAWS Section 10 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

B. Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

3. Fasten
wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) oc with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

E. Secure cabinet bases to floor using appropriate anchorages. Permanently fix countertops to wall using appropriate angles.

F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

G. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.

H. Upon completion of installation, clean all installed items. Remove pencil and ink marks from surfaces. Leave area of work broom clean.

I. Protect countertops after installation; do not allow other trades to use countertops as footstools or ladders to perform their work. Cover completed cabinetwork with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner to permit easy removal.

3.4 COUNTERTOP INSTALLATION
A. Install woodwork to comply with NAAWS Section 11 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

B. At Base Units: Anchor securely to base units.

1. Align adjacent countertops and form seams handtight to minimize joints using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. At Walls: Permanently fix countertops to wall using appropriate angles. Secure countertops in place, square, plumb and level.

D. Carefully scribe countertops abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch.

Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. Caulking not to exceed 1/16 inch in width.

E. Equipment cut-outs indicated on plans within countertops shall be cut by countertop installer.

F. Mechanical fasteners are not allowed at exposed surfaces.

G. Upon completion of installation, clean all installed items. Remove pencil and ink marks from surfaces. Leave area of work broom clean.

H. Protect countertops after installation; do not allow other trades to use countertops as footstools or ladders to perform their work. Cover completed cabinetwork with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner to permit easy removal.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Repair
damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

B. Upon completion of installation, clean all installed items. Remove pencil and ink marks from surfaces. Leave area of work broom clean.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

D. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

E. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.7 CABINET HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Section 08710. Where manufacturer's name or product number is not indicated provide best quality commercially available cabinet hardware.

B. Cabinet Shelf Pilaster Standards and Rests: BHMA A156.9, all components steel, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081:

1. Acceptable Products, Heavy-Duty Pilaster Standards:
a. KV 255 Series.
b. Sugatsune SPE-1820.
c. Accepted equivalent.

2. Acceptable Products, Shelf Rests:
a. Bainbridge Mfg, Inc.; No. BB32201CL-32, 5mm dual locking shelf clip b. Sugatsune SPF-20
c. Accepted equivalent.

C. Adjustable Shelving Brackets and Standards: for 14-inch shelves:

1. Acceptable Products, Heavy-Duty Pilaster Standards:
a. KV 85 Series.
b. Sugatsune SPE-1820.
c. Accepted equivalent.

2. Acceptable Products, Heavy-Duty Brackets:
a. KV 183.
b. Sugatsune, SPB-200.
c. Accepted equivalent.

D. Seismic Shelf Clips: BHMA A156.9, B04013:

1. Hafele; 282.24.721.

1. Acceptabl
e Products:
a. KV 8805.
b. Accuride 3640A.
c. Accepted equivalent.

2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravel- extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.

3. Full extension slides with 1-inch overtravel, side-mount, a. General Purpose Drawers: 200 lb capacity.

4. Size slides in accordance with manufacturers recommendations for drawer width.

F. Drawer and Door Pulls:

1. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

2. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter, and: 1-1/4" (32mm) projection.

G. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 110 degrees of opening, self-closing.

1. Acceptable Products:
a. Blum BLUMOTION.
b. Hafele.
c. Accepted equivalent.

2. Provide three hinges for doors over 48 inches in height.

H. Cabinet, Sliding Door, and Drawer Locks:

1. Medeco High Security Locks.

2. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

3. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Shelf Labels: Provide one of the following, or equal:

1. Type: Clip-on shelf label holders, 1" x 5" including blank white labels as manufactured by Library Supplies & Furnishings #44-475-001, black, 3-1/4" x 7-3/4" x 1-1/2", with blank labels and clear covers in white, #44-476-001,

2. Type: Self-adhesive holders, 3/8" high holders cut to 5" length, with white labels as manufactured by Holdex.

3. Provide 50 percent more quantity than number of mailbox shelves shown on Drawings.

J. File Drawer Edging: Vertical Files: Hafele, "Aluminum Hanging File Rail Systems", anodized aluminum, satin silver finish. Note that the width of the drawer box is very specific to letter size files; fabricate the width of the file drawer units sized to handle files without wasted width.

K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded- plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

L. Slide-out container holder for recycling & trash is required in every kitchen, unit or common.

Where used under sinks, provide an offset and backset sink to allow clearance for this system and the garbage disposal

1. Waste Bin: Rev-A-Shelf RV Series; RV-18PB-2. Double 35 quart trash container. 1 per unit.

2. False front tip out try system: Amerock, Rev-A-Shelf #6581.

M. Grommets
through Countertops for Trash Disposal: 6-inch diameter x 2-inch deep stainless steel ring.

N. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

2. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base.

3. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

4. Satin Nickel: BHMA 646 or 670.

O. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

END OF SECTION 06 4100
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4100-10
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06 6413-1
SECTION 06 6413 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting at Janitor Closets.

B. Moldings and joint sealants.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

B. Samples for Selection: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Instructions: For inclusion in maintenance manual.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

3. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06 6413-2

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environment
al Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D5319.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Marlite.
b. Crane Composites/Kemlite.
c. Nudo Products, Inc.

2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm).

3. Surface Texture: High-gloss, smooth.

4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.

B. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.

1. Color: Match panels.

2. Base Molding: Design that simplifies installation and helps seal wall panel system, with factory made corners and splices.

3. Borders: 4-inch (100 mm) wide decorative strips made of same material as panels.

C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone as recommended by panel manufacturer.

1. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Color: Clear.

D. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer.

E. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate.

F. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3.1 EXAM

INATION
A. Verify that backing surfaces have been properly prepared according to manufacturers written requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

C. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation.

E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide.

1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation.

2. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Cut sheets to meet supports allowing 1/8 (3 mm) clearance for every 8 feet (2.4m) of panel.

1. Cut and drill with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with shears.

2. Pre-drill fastener holes 1/8 (3mm) oversize with high-speed drill bit. a. Space at 8 (200mm) maximum on center at perimeter, approximately 1 from panel edge.
b. Space at in field in rows 16 (40.64cm) on center, with fasteners spaced at 12 (30.48 cm) maximum on center.

D. Apply panels to board substrate, above base, vertically oriented with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels.

1. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. a. Adhesive trowel and application method to conform to adhesive manufacturers recommendations.
b. Drive fasteners for snug fit. Do not over-tighten.

E. Apply panel moldings to all panel edges using silicone sealant providing for required clearances.

1. All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 (3mm) of panel expansion at joints and edges, to insure proper install
ation.

2. Apply sealant to all moldings, channels and joints between the system and different materials to assure watertight installation.

F. Install trim accessories with adhesive.

G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

H. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8-inch (3 mm) expansion space.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.

B. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary and replace if not possible to repair to original condition.

C. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 06 6413
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326-1
SECTION 07 1326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Below-grade rubberized asphalt, self-adhering, sheet membrane waterproofing system.

B. Asphalt hardboard protection.

C. Hydrophilic waterstop at cold joints at wall areas and at through-wall pipe penetrations.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. Include certification of data indicating VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all components of the waterproofing system.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings approved by manufacturer for site-specific detail conditions.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer verifying installers comply with specified requirements.

B. Qualification Data: For installer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Sheet membrane waterproofing systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a minimum of 20 years experience in the production and sales of self-adhesive sheet membrane waterproofing. Manufacturers proposed for use, but not named in these specifications shall submit evidence of ability to meet all requirements specified, and include a list of projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past 5 years.

B. Installer: A firm which has at least 3 years of experience in work of the type required by this section.

C. Source Quality Control: For each type of material required for the work of this section, provide primary materials which are the products of one manufacturer.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326-2
D. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement
of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. . Agenda for meeting shall include review of construction document and submittals, special details and flashing; and scheduling of the Work.

1. Meeting Attendees: Include representatives from the Contractor, installer, waterproofing material manufacturer, waterproofing consultant and Owner.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturers instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations.

Remove damaged material from the site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.

B. Do not double-stack pallets of membrane on the job site. Provide cover on top and all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation.

C. Protect primer, mastic and adhesive from moisture and potential sources of ignition.

D. Store protection board flat and off the ground. Provide cover on top and all sides.

E. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the manufacturer of the materials and products used.

B. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in condition to receive sheet membrane waterproofing.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2.1 MA

TERIALS
A. Sheet Membrane Waterproofing: Bituthene 4000 Membrane by GCP Applied Technologies a self-adhesive, cold-applied composite sheet consisting of a thickness of 1.4 mm (0.056 in.) of rubberized asphalt and 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) of cross-laminated, high density polyethylene film. Provide rubberized asphalt membrane covered with a release sheet which is removed during installation. No special adhesive or heat shall be required to form laps.

B. Protection Board:

1. Asphalt Hardboard: A premolded semi-rigid protection board consisting of bitumen, mineral core and reinforcement. Provide one layer 0.25 inch thick hardboard on horizontal surfaces.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

D. Liquid Membrane: Bituthene Liquid Membrane; elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.

F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick, predrilled at 9-inch (229-mm) centers.

G. Engineered swell hydrophilic waterstop: GCP Applied Technologies; Adcor ES.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Refer to manufacturers literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, looser aggregate and sharp Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326-4
protrusions. Remove contaminates such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces.

Remove dust,
dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing.

B. Cast-In-Place Concrete Substrates:

1. Do not proceed with installation until concrete has properly cured and dried (minimum 7 days for normal structural concrete and minimum 14 days for lightweight structural concrete).

2. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface.

3. Repair bugholes over 13 mm (0.5 in.) in length and 6 mm (0.25 in.) deep and finish flush with surrounding surface.

4. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area.

5. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface.

C. Masonry Substrates: Apply waterproofing over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel- cut mortar joints or parge coat.

D. Wood Substrates: Apply waterproofing membrane over securely fastened sound surface. All joints and fasteners shall be flush to create a smooth surface.

E. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashing as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to manufacturers literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following:

1. Apply primer at the rate recommended by manufacturer. Recoat areas not waterproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of primer.

2. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary with weather conditions.

3. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic.

4. Provide minimum 3/4-inch fillet Bituthene liquid membrane at inside corners.

B. Vertical Surfaces: Apply membrane in length up to 8-feet (2.5m). Overlap all seams at least 2-1/2-inches. On higher walls apply membrane in two or more sections with the upper overlapping the lower by at least 2-1/2-inches. Roll all membrane with a hand roller.

1. Provide minimum 2-inch wide by minimum 3/16-inch thick application of Bituthene liquid membrane over side and end laps.

C. Terminate the membrane at grade level as indicated on Drawings. Secure into a reglet or termination bar to ensure a tight seal.

D. Terminate membrane at the base of the wall t . as indicated on Drawings.

E. Membrane Repairs:

1. Patch tears and inadequately lapped seams with membrane. Clean membrane with damp cloth and dry.

2. Slit fishmouths and repair with a patch extending 6-inches (150mm) in all direction from the
slit and seal edges of the patch with minimum 2-inch wide by minimum 3/16- inch thick Bituthene Liquid Membrane.

3. Inspect the membrane thoroughly before covering and make any repairs.

F. Inspect membrane system and repair damage immediately prior to installation of protection board.

3.4 PROTECTION BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure protection board according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use waterproofing manufacturer-approved adhesives or mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Protect installed protection board during subsequent construction.

B. Place backfill as soon as possible. Use care during backfill operation to avoid damage to the waterproofing system. Follow generally accepted practices for backfilling and compaction.

Backfill should be added and compacted in 6-inch (150mm) to 12-inch (300mm) lifts.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials which would be exposed in the completed work.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed membrane waterproofing from subsequent construction activities as recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 07 1326
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326-6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100-1
SECTION 07 2100 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCU
MENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Insulation in batt form of the following types:

1. Acoustic glass fiber insulation.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of insulation product specified.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E84.

2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119.

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 G

LASS FIBER INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

B. Batt Insulation:

1. Batt Width: Maximum width as required for application.

2. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
a. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.
b. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

C. Insulation for Sound Attenuation: ASTM C665; Type I preformed acoustic glass fiber batts conforming to the following:

1. Batt Width: Maximum width as required for application.

2. Thickness: 3-5/8-inches.

3. Facing: Unfaced.

4. Fire Performance Characteristics: ASTM E84:
a. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25.
b. Smoke Developed: Less than 50.

5. Overall Sound Transmission: STC 50.

6. Minimum density of 6 lb/cu ft (96 kg/cu m), thermal resistivity of 4.5 deg F x h x sq ft/Btu x in. at 75 deg F (31.2 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

D. Exposed Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C423, black fiber glass blanket insulation:

1. Product: CertainTeed AcoustaBlanket

2. Batt Width: 48-inches.

3. Thickness: 2-inches.

4. R-Value: R-8.3 minimum.

5. Facing: Unfaced, Class A for exposed applications.

6. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

7. Smoke Developed: Less than 50, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

8. NRC: 1.0.

9. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu ft (24 kg/cu m).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory.

B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.

C. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation.

B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.

D. Install in exterior walls, roof, and soffit spaces where indicated, without gaps or voids.

E. Install for sound attenuation in interior walls, above toilet room ceilings, and over suspended ceilings where indicated, without gaps or voids.

3.3 INSTALLATION, BATT INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Install batt insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically.

C. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.

Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume (to a density of approximately 2.5 pcf).

3.4 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100-4

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect
installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION 07 2100
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS 07 2616-1
SECTION 07 2616 BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Heavy-duty under-slab plastic vapor retarder.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Vapor Retarder Assembly: The collection of vapor retarder materials and auxiliary materials applied over free draining gravel, including the sealing of sheet laps, joints, and penetrations, forming an impermeable membrane to control movement of moisture up through slabs-on- grade.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation requirements, techniques.

B. Certificates of Compliance: Include the name, description of the product. Provide third party independent testing reports to verify compliance with referenced standards.

1. When Certificates of Compliance cannot be provided, the Contractor shall hire a professional testing laboratory to verify compliance. Contractor shall pay for the cost of testing.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturers recommend methods.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain vapor retarder material and installation accessories from single source providing consistent quality in performance and appearance without delaying progress of the Work.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS 07 2616-2

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect vapor re
tarder materials from puncture damage prior to use.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for handling and storage, and protection during installation.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace vapor retarder material that does not comply with requirements or that fails achieve a watertight seal, or exhibits loss of adhesion or cohesion within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Project Acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous vapor retarder under floor slab throughout the building, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings and ASTM E1643.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder Sheeting: ASTM E1745, Class B, 15.0 mil total thickness, 14'-0" wide sheets.

1. Products: Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils, Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra, or approved equal.

2. Puncture Resistance, ASTM D1709, Method B: 3,000 grams

3. Tensile Strength, ASTM E154, Section 9: 67 lbf / in.

4. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM F1249: 0.0067 perms.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Polyethylene pressure sensitive, self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 4-inch wide, compatible with vapor retarder material.

1. Perimeter Tape: Stego Industries; Crete Claw.

2. Lap Tape: Stego Industries; Stego Tape.

3. Penetration Tape: Stego Industries; Stego Mastic.

4. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.3 perms or lower.

B. Adhesive: Compatible with vapor retarder and substrate, permanently non-curing; as manufactured by vapor retarder manufacturer, with demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E96; 0.3 perms or lower C. Pipe Boots: Solid 10 mill pre-manufactured peel and stick patching product with aggressive all-weather adhesive for direct adhesion to vapor retarder surface, pipes and penetrations.

1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E96; 0.0016 perms or lower Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS 07 2616-3
D. Cleaner for Vapor Retarder: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAM

INATION
A. Verify required condition of substrate and adjacent construction with installer present. Make any corrections before proceeding with vapor retarder installation.

B. Do not proceed with installation of retarder until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with installation indicates acceptance of substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose or foreign matter that might impair adhesion.

B. Level and tamp or roll aggregate, sand or tamped earth base. Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect.

C. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install vapor retarder materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643 requirements.

B. Lay vapor retarder over base rock with width of sheet running parallel with the direction of concrete pour.

C. Lap vapor retarder 6 inches minimum and seal with 4-inch wide adhesive tape. Position lap seals over firm bearing. Tape joints.

D. Lap vapor retarder 3 inches over footings and grade beams. Seal membrane to concrete with adhesive or concrete nail every 5 foot on footing surface.

E. Offset intermediate end joints in adjacent sheets no less than 4 feet.

F. Cut sheeting to fit closely and neatly around penetrations of pipe and conduit. Seal tears and punctures.

G. Slip sheeting over penetrations where possible, otherwise slit from penetration hole to nearest edge.

H. Slip pipe boots fabricated from sheeting material over penetration holes and tape in place completely.

1. Single pipe penetrations may be sealed using pipe boot constructed from the product.

Cut a piece of plastic 12-inches wide x 1-1/2 times the circumference of the pipe. With scissors, cut slits half the width of the film Wrap boot around pipe; tape onto pipe and completely tape the base to the vapor barrier.

2. Multiple pipe penetrations in close proximity and very small pipes shall be sealed using mastic.

Cut out a small area around pipes. Cut a patch of vapor barrier extending at least 6-inches past the cut out in all directions. Cut Xs or small circles in the patch and install over pipes. Overlap at least 6-inches and tape. Build up 40- to 60-mils of mastic or as required to completely fill voids between the pipe and the vapor barrier.

I. Seal penetrations of pipe and conduit with tape to ensure an airtight seal. Seal tears and punctures with tape immediately before proceeding with covering the vapor retarder. Use a second layer of vapor retarder material where damage to vapor retarder is extensive and would require excessive use of tape to repair.

1. No penetration of the vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

2. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.

J. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect installed vapor retarders from damage by harmful weather exposure, and other construction activities.

B. Repair any punctures to vapor retarder before pouring concrete slab over retarder.

C. Do not permit adjacent Work to damage Work of this Section.

END OF SECTION 07 2616
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 UNDERLAYMENTS 07 2729-1
SECTION 07 2729 UNDERLAYMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide underlayments and self-adhered flashings for window openings and equipment pads for complete watertight installation:

1. Portland Cement Plaster Underlayment: Building paper underlayment and flashing for lath and plaster.

2. Flexible Flashings at Underlayment Penetrations: Sheet membrane flexible flashing at miscellaneous locations including terminations of building paper underlayment, penetrations through building paper underlayment and curb/cap/threshold horizontal surfaces.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 6000 Flashing and Sheet Metal: Underlayment for flashings.

B. Section 09 2400 Portland Cement Plastering: Application of self-adhering bituminous sheet flashing at terminations, openings, and penetrations.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected.

1. Building Paper: 12-inches (300 mm) square.

2. Flexible Flashing Material: 12-inches (300 mm) square.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for installation.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of underlayment material from single source providing consistent quality in performance and appearance without delaying progress of the Work.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 UNDERLAYMENTS 07 2729-2
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review requirements for waterproofing, includi
ng surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect underlayment materials from puncture damage prior to use.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for handling and storage, and protection during installation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace installed underlayment materials that do not comply with requirements or that fail achieve a watertight seal, or exhibits loss of adhesion or cohesion within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous underlayments without gaps or holes where indicated on Drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Building Paper: FS UU-B-790a, Type 1, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable, 60-minute building paper.

1. Locations: At plaster walls where shown.
a. Manufacturer: Fortifiber; Super Jumbo Tex.

B. Flexible Flashings (SAF): Self-adhered rubberized sheet membrane consisting of self- adhesive rubberized asphalt bonded to a cross-laminated high-density polyethylene film with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation, compliant with local regulations on VOC's and as follows:

1. Membrane Flashings at Building Paper Underlayment Terminations and Corners: 25- mil membrane, manufacturers and types as follows:
a. GCP Applied Technologies: Vycor Plus.

2. Membrane Flashings at Openings in Vertical Surfaces and Underlayment Penetrations:
40-mil membrane, manufacturers and types as follows:
a. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing: Window and Door Flashing. b. GCP Applied Technologies: Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing.

C. Tape: Polyethylene pressure sensitive, self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2-inch (25 mm) wide, compatible with underlayment.

1. GCP Applied Technologies: Preprufe Tape.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 UNDERLAYMENTS 07 2729-3
D. Adhesive: Compatible with underlayment and substrate, permanently non-curing; as recommended by underlaym
ent manufacturer.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer for Sheet Membrane: As recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify required condition of substrate and adjacent construction with installer present. Make any corrections before proceeding with underlayment installation.

B. Do not proceed with installation of underlayments until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with installation indicates acceptance of substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose or foreign matter that might impair adhesion.

B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install underlayment materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Refer to manufacturers literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following:

2. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary with weather conditions.

3. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic.

C. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

D. Seal penetrations of pipe and conduit with tape to ensure an airtight seal. Seal tears and punctures with tape immediately before proceeding with covering the underlayment. Use a second layer of underlayment material where damage to underlayment is extensive and would require excessive use of tape to repair.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 UNDERLAYMENTS 07 2729-4

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect
installed underlayments from damage by harmful weather exposure, and other construction activities.

B. Do not permit adjacent Work to damage Work of this Section.

END OF SECTION 07 2729
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 07 46 46-1
SECTION 07 46 46 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Primed for paint fiber cement board panels
B. Primed for paint fiber cement trim batten boards

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

C. Section 07 21 19 - Foamed-In-Place Insulation.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Tool, and Tape.

B. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by 6 inches (100 by 150 mm), representing actual product, color, and patterns.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years' experience with installation of similar products.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.

C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent- Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 07 46 46-2
based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside the manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Limited, non-pro-rated product warranty.

1. Panels for 30 years.

2. Trim Batten Boards for 30 years.

B. Workmanship Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basisi of Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc., which is located at: 303 E.

Wacker Dr.; Chicago, IL 60601 ; Toll Free Tel: 877-236-7526; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: https://www.jameshardiepros.com | https://www.jameshardie.com
B. Requests for approval of equal substitutions will be considered in accordance with the provisions of S
ection 01.

2.2 SIDING AND TRIM
A.

1. Siding requirement for Materials:

2. Fiber-cement siding - complies with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II.

3. Fiber-cement siding - complies with ASTM E 136 as a noncombustible material.

4. Fiber-cement Siding - complies with ASTM E 84 Flame. Spread Index: 0.

Smoke Developed Index: 5.

5. ICC-ES evaluation report ESR-2290.

6. Intertek Product Listing.

7. CAL-FIRE, Fire Engineering Division Building Materials Listing - Wildland Urban Interface (WUI) Listed Product.

B. Board Siding:

1. Type: Smooth finish, primed for paint 48 in. wide. Installed with siding nails.

C. Trim: Trim Batten Boards 2.5 wide

1. Type: Smooth finish, primed for paint, every 12 O.C. Installed with siding nails
D. A non-combustible fiber-cement panel.

1. Product Composition: Grade II, Type A, fiber-cement sheets as defined by ASTM C1186. manufactured by the Hatschek process and cured by high pressure steam autoclaving.

2. Intertek Product Listing.

3. Code Compliance:

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 07 46 46-3
a. California Building Code (CBC):
1) Section 14

04.10: 2022.
b. Wind Design:
1) Manufacturer's readily available design load and exposure category tables are derived from testing in accordance with ASTM E 330.
2) Wind speed design coefficient assumptions per Analytical Method in ASCE 7.
3) Wood Framing Specific Gravity: 0.42 or greater unless otherwise stated.
4) Wood Structural Sheathing Panel Specific Gravity of 0.50 or higher unless otherwise stated.

4. Fire Characteristics:
a. Tested in Accordance with ASTM E136: Classified as non-combustible. b. May be used in ASTM E119 fire resistance rated assemblies as listed by Warnock Hersey.
c. Class A Material: Per FBC 2017 and 2020, and 2018 IBC Section 803.1.1 Surface Burning Characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E84:
1) Flame Spread Index : 0. Smoke Developed Index: 0.

5. Physical Properties:
a. Test Method ASTM C1185: Passed.
1) Dimensional Tolerances:
a) Length: Plus or minus 0.5 percent or plus or minus1/4 inch (6 mm).
b) Width: Plus or minus 0.5 percent or plus or minus1/4 inch (6 mm).
c) Thickness: Plus or minus 0.04 inch (1 mm).
d) Squareness: Less than1/32 inches per ft (2.6 mm per m) of length.
e) Edge Straightness: Less than 1/32 inches per ft (2.6 mm per m) of length.
2) Density: Less than 83 pounds per sq ft (4 kPa).
3) Water Tightness: No drop formation; Pass.
4) Flexural strength:
a) Wet Conditioned, psi: Greater than 1015 psi (7 MPa); Pass.
b) Equilibrium Conditioned, psi: Greater than 1450 psi (10 MPa); Pass.
5) Warm Water Resistance, Observations: No structural alteration; Pass.
6) Heat and Rain Resistance: No structural alteration; Pass. 7) Freeze and Thaw Resistance:
a) Physical Observations Mass: No structural alteration; Pass.
b) Loss Percentage: Less than or equal to 3.0 percent; Pass. c) Freeze/Thaw, Percent Strength Retention: Greater than or equal to 80 percent; Pass.
b. Fire Characteristics:
1) ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics.
a) Flame Spread Index (FSI) Smoke: 0.
b) Developed Index (SDI): 0.
c) Fuel Contributed: 0.
d) International Building Code: A.
2) ASTM E136: Non-combustibility: Pass.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 07 46 46-4

2.3 FlNlSHES
A. Factory finishes: Provid
e samples for review by architect.

1. Panel: Smooth finish, primed for paint

2. Trim Batten Boards: Smooth finish, primed for paint
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until the substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Nominal 2 inch by 4 inch (51 mm by 102 mm) wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and complying with local building codes, including the use of water- resistive barriers or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned.

1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.

2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding.

3. Protect siding from other trades.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 07 46 46-5

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clea
n surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Install a water-resistive barrier is required in accordance with local building code requirements.

D. The water-resistive barrier must be appropriately installed with penetration and junction flashing in accordance with local building code requirements.

E. Install Engineered for Climate Hardie Weather Barrier in accordance with local building code requirements.

F. Use Hardie Weather Barrier Seam Tape and joint and laps.

G. Install and Hardie Weather Barrier flashing, Hardie Weather Barrier Flex Flashing.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PANELS
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install over braced wood. See General Fastening Requirements. Irregularities in framing and sheathing can mirror through the finished application. Correct irregularities before installing siding.

C. A water-resistive barrier (WRB) is required in accordance with local building code requirements. The water-resistive barrier must be appropriately installed with penetration and junction flashing in accordance with local building code requirements. James Hardie will assume no responsibility for water infiltration.

James Hardie does manufacture Hardie Weather Barrier, a non-woven non- perforated housewrap, which complies with building code requirements.

D. Install vent mat layer over WRB. Cedar Breather ® Ventilated Underlayment by Benjamin Obdyke, or similar acceptable substitution
E. When installing horizontally, a WRB with min. 90 percent drainage efficiency shall be used.

F. Adjacent finished grade must slope away from the building in accordance with local building codes - typically a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm). in the first 10 ft (3.048 mm).

G. Do not install that product remains in contact with standing water.

H. Installed on flat vertical wall applications only.

I. For larger projects where the span of the wall is significant in length, the designer and/or architect should take into consideration the coefficient of thermal expansion and moisture movement of the product in their design. These values can be found in the Technical Bulletin "Expansion Characteristics of James Hardie Siding Products" at www.jameshardie.com.

J. James Hardie Building Products provides installation /wind load information for buildings with a maximum mean roof height of 85 feet (25.9 m). For information on Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 07 46 46-6
installations above 60 feet (18.288 m), please contact JH technical support.

K. Minim
um standard panel design size is 12 x 16 inches (305 x 406 mm). Panels may be notched and cut to size to fit between windows, doors, corners, etc.

3.4 FINISHING
A. Panels and trim to be primed for paint. Contractor to provide samples of painted applications.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal flashings of the following types:

1. Metal flashing and counter flashings.

2. Exposed metal trim/fascia units.

3. Reglets.

4. Copings.

5. Roof drainage components including scuppers, downspouts, and splash pans.

6. Through-wall flashings.

7. Preformed flashing sleeves.

8. Equipment support flashings.

9. Finish: Painted UON.

B. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 4113 Metal Roof Panels.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for metallic-coated (galvanized) steel sheets. Metal thicknesses indicated below correspond to former gauge thicknesses:

1. 16 Gauge: 0.053-inch (1.3-mm).

2. 18 Gauge: 0.042-inch (1.0-mm).

3. 20 Gauge: 0.040-inch (1.02-mm).

4. 22 Gauge: 0.034-inch (0.85-mm).

5. 24 Gauge: 0.028-inch (0.71-mm).

6. 26 Gauge: 0.022-inch (0.55-mm).

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Describe material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, interface with other work and installation details.

1. Material.

2. Thickness of material.

3. Weight.

4. Finish.

5. Location of each item and details of expansion joint covers, including the direction of expansion and contraction.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to profiles and sizes shown on drawings, and comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA, for each general category of work required.

B. Applicator: Applicator who has complete sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance and with 5 years minimum experience.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.

D. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. Build mock-ups approximately 48-inches long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories. Do not proceed with the installation until the mock-ups are approved by the Architect in writing.

1. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at the time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with a suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFO

RMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Fabricate and install flashings and copings capable of resisting forces for the appropriate wind zone, per Factory Mutual's Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.

C. Temperature Range: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F, material surface.

D. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the maximum range of ambient and surface temperatures provided above by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of sealant joints, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

E. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to the building interior.

1. Watertight and weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is required.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized where indicated for field painting.

1. Do not apply an acrylic passivator coating to galvanized sheet metal scheduled to be painted, or remove this coating mechanically before delivery to the project site.

2. Prime all surfaces of bonderized metal.

3. Finish: Standard (dull) mill finish; painted unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

4. Paint: Paint sheet galvanized sheet metal that is not coil-coated.

B. Sheet Membrane Underlayment at Flashings: Self-adhered, cold-applied composite rubberized asphalt sheet membrane consisting of rubberized asphalt bonded to a cross- laminated high-density polyethylene film with primers and seam sealers as required for a complete watertight installation; provide materials compliant with applicable regulations limiting VOCs.

1. Under Sheet Metal and Flashing: Minimum 40-mil thick, high temperature self- adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet membrane, complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M, manufacturers and types as follows:
a. Grace Construction Products: Grace Ice and Water Shield HT or Grace Ultra HT.

C. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type.

D. Plastic Cement: Asphaltic base cement.

1. For
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

F. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape.

G. Sealant: Type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight; see Section 07 9200.

H. Flux: FS O-F-506.

I. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

J. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

L. Fasteners: Wood screws, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated.

1. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers and with channel for sealant at top edge.

2. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.

3. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.

4. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

2.4 ROO

F DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections.

Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, [ gutter bead reinforcing bars,] and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.

1. Material
: Galvanized steel; 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

2. Finish: Painted.

3. Strainers: Wire ball downspout strainers in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-24D.

B. Downspouts: ASTM A53/A53M; Type F or Type S, Grade A, standard weight Schedule 40 pipe; coped and mitered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Furnish with metal hangers, supports, and anchors.

1. Material: Galvanized steel; 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

2. Finish: Painted.

C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim, and built- in overflows.

1. Galvanized steel; 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

2. Finish: Painted.

2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400- mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide joint cover plates.

1. Galvanized steel; 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

2. Finish: Painted.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop-fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

B. Fabricate sheet metal with flat-lock seams; solder with type solder and flux recommended by manufacturer, except seal aluminum seams with sealant and, where required for strength, rivet seams and joints.

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness and weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application of metal.

D. Fabricate corners, transitions, and terminations as a single unit; extend a minimum of 4-inches and a maximum of 8-inches in any direction.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-6
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from the same material as the accessory being anchored or
from a compatible, non-corrosive metal. The thickness of these cleats and attachment devices should be as recommended by SMACNA's 'Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' and Factory Mutual's Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the given application, but not less than the thickness of the metal being secured.

F. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.

G. Coat backside of fabricated sheet metal with 15-mil sulfur-free bituminous coating, SSPC- Paint 12, where required to separate metals from corrosive substrates, including cementitious materials, wood or other absorbent materials; or provide other permanent separation.

H. Provide for thermal expansion of running sheet metal work by overlaps of expansion joints in fabricated work. Where required for watertight construction, provide hooked flanges filled with polyisobutylene mastic for 1-inch embedment of flanges.

I. Space expansion joints at intervals of not more than 50-feet. Conceal expansion provisions where possible.

J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Galvanized steel; 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

2. Finish: Painted.

2.7 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Ensure that adjacent work by other trades has been completed as required and as shown on the Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Allow wet substrates to dry thoroughly.

B. Clean debris from all substrates.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.

Apply primer
if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses.

Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Anchor work in place with non-corrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and other materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of each material or system.

C. Install self-adhesive flashing prior to or in conjunction with sheet metal items, as shown on Drawings.

D. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendations of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA.

E. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

F. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

G. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

H. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

I. Composition Stripping: Cover flanges (edges) of work set on bituminous substrate with 5 courses of glass fiber fabric (ASTM D1668/D1668M) set in and covered with asphaltic roofing cement.

J. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4-inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4-inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.

3. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Exposed fasteners should have bonded neoprene washers or should be sealed.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-8
K. Seal moving joints in metal work with butyl joint sealants, complying with requirements specified in Section 07 9200 as requi
red for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1-inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant- type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

L. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2-inches (38 mm) except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work.

1. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

2. Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances that could cause corrosion.

3.5 ELASTOMERIC SHEET MEMBRANE COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION AT

PENETRATIONS
A. Surface Preparation:

1. Remove oil, grease, scale, paint dust, corrosion products, and any other materials that may affect the adhesive bond of the elastomeric sheet membrane.

2. Etch concrete, masonry, and metal surfaces with 10% muriatic acid.

B. Apply primer to clean, dry surface immediately after surface preparation.

1. Allow to dry 2 hours minimum.

2. Do not apply primer to membrane.

3. Install bond breaker tape centered over joint between penetration and top edge of flashing collar.

C. Renew primer if over 24 hours elapses before application of adhesive.

D. Application of Adhesive:

1. Apply two even brush coats of adhesive to substrate.

2. Allow 15 minutes drying time between coats.

3. Apply one full coat of adhesive to membrane sheet.

4. Minimum drying times:
a. Allow sufficient adhesive drying to take place to prevent trapping of solvents in the adhesive, which causes significant weakening of bond strength. b. Minimum drying times have been observed to range between 10 minutes in warm, dry weather (90 def F, 10% relative humidity), to 1/2 hour in colder weather.
c. Do not attempt joining coated surfaces during the drying time. d. Form bonds after adhesive becomes dull, and while still sticky. e. If adhesive is 'open' too long before joining coated surfaces, the membrane will no longer adhere to substrate; reactive adhesive by applying an additional full coat of adhesive.

1. Elastome
ric sheet membrane may be stretched during placement, to 1% to 2% elongation in final position, to conform to various contours, without undo stress to membrane during placement, and without damage to cured membrane.

2. Provided a plastic or clot liner is used, membrane may be rolled or folded; use caution as adhesive coated surfaces bond readily to uncoated membrane surfaces.

3. Apply sheet by unrolling or otherwise placing in position and flattening with the hand to prevent air entrapment.

4. Do not work too large an area at a time.

5. Roll all of the area with a steel flat face roller.

6. 'Stitch' all edges, corners and laps using a 2-inch x 1/4-inch knurled hand stitcher and stiff pressure.

7. Overlap edges a minimum of 3-inches and end joints 6-inches in such a way as to shed water.

8. At all edge intersections of laps including inside or outside corners, apply a fillet of membrane sealant.

F. Application of Color Coating: Apply adhesive to elastomeric sheet membrane and allow to dry as described above.

1. Coat elastomeric membrane with U66A to provide a 15-mil dry film thickness.

3.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36-inches (900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1-inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60-inches (1500 mm) oc in between.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.

2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

1. Install scupper over roof plies before cap sheet is installed.

2. Strip in scupper flanges with two stripping plies; install cap sheet over stripping plies.

3. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper.

4. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.

5. Seal or solder exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head.

E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1-inch (25 mm) below scupper and gutter discharges.

3.7 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General:

Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with claps, joints, and seams that will be watertight.

B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4-inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4-inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4-inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.

1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers.

2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch (600-mm) centers.

3. Do not cover scupper overflows with copings.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof.

1. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof. Use stainless steel drawband and tighten.

2. Install premanufactured membrane flashing a minimum of 8 inches up vent piping and over base roof membrane, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. Seal flashing to base roof membrane where required by roofing manufacturer.

3. Seal top of membrane flashing with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes with stainless steel drawband.

3.8 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: At plaster walls, extend flashing through plaster system, across air space behind plaster, and up face of sheathing at least 8-inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4-inches (100 mm).

1. Install metal sealant stops with sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 9200 for application indicated.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment
Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

C. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 07 6000
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 6000-12
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-1
SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Non-traffic Surfaces:

1. At flashing and sheet metal.

2. Perimeter joints around frames of storefronts, doors, windows, and louvers.

B. Interior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Non-traffic Surfaces:

1. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

2. Perimeter joints of exterior openings.

3. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls and partitions.

4. Interior rated and non-rated sealants.

5. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances.

6. Perimeter joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

7. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.

8. Acoustical joints in wall and ceiling surfaces.

C. Joint sealant primers and accessories.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 6000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Sealing of perimeter joint and through-wall penetrations.

C. Section 08 8100 Glass Glazing: Sealants used in glazing.

D. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board: Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each product required, including instructions for joint preparation and sealant application. Include certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants, primers, and cleaners comply with local regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds (VOC).

1. Include tested physical and performance properties. Include data sheets for substrate cleaners and substrate primers recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific substrate surface conditions.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-2

2. Include certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants, primers, and cleaners comply with
local regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). Include tested physical and performance properties.

3. Include data sheets for substrate cleaners and substrate primers recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific substrate surface conditions.

4. SCAQMD Rule 1113 compliant VOC testing compliance statement B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm- ) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

1. Submit 2 copies of manufacturers standard color chart with physical samples of each color. Submit information on availability of custom colored sealants.

C. Joint Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint sealant application and typical joint locations to receive sealants.

2. Joint sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint sealant formulation and color.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

B. Submit manufacturers letter of certification that products comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the uses intended.

C. Product Test Reports:

1. Certified test results of elastomeric sealants showing compliance with specified requirements. Include results of aged performances including hardness, stain- resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, low temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100-percent strain, effects of heat and aging, and effects of accelerated weathering.

2. Preconstruction field test results indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

1. Ensure that sealants selected are compatible with and will adhere to all surfaces with which they are to be in contact.

C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Work.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

D. Sealant manufacturer shall confirm in writing that all materials contacting the sealants, including joint backings, gaskets, spacers, and joint substrates, are compatible with the sealant to be installed. Schedule sufficient time to test these materials for compatibility with the sealant, as necessary. Compatibility tests shall be performed to the sealant manufacturers standards.

1. Determine if priming and/or other preparation techniques are required.

2. Determine compatibility of exterior joint sealant with stone material to be used. Verify that joint sealant oils do not migrate onto stone face causing visual banding while wet or dry. Manufacturer shall perform staining tests of sealant systems in accordance with ASTM C510 and ASTM D2203 methods for each joint substrate condition in the work.

3. Testing for adhesion is not required if sealant manufacturer has performed previous testing of proposed sealants for adhesion to and compatibility with required joints substrates.

E. Sealant manufacturer shall confirm in writing the appropriate joint preparation and priming techniques required to obtain rapid, acceptable adhesion of the joint sealants to the joint substrates.

F. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test adhesion to all joint substrates and surface types. Field adhesion testing shall be completed and results shall be reviewed and approved by sealant manufacturer and installer before commencing sealant installation.

1. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths. Allow to cure before testing. Test adhesion by pulling sealant out of joint according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

2. Perform field tests for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.

3. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

4. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate.

5. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrate during testing.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-4
G. Pre-Installation Meeting: Review joint application procedures, compatibility tests, adhesion tests, and
warranty requirements in a meeting involving installer, manufacturer or manufacturers representative, building owner or manager, consultant, and contractor.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials intact and legible.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

2. Below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

3. When joint substrates are wet or retaining moisture.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Exterior Sealants: Furnish a written warranty against leaks or other defects of materials, fabrication, and installation. Defects include but are not limited to changes in the structural, physical or chemical properties of the sealant materials that impair function or require abnormal maintenance, changes in surface finish, color or texture, failure in adhesion, weather resistance or durability, failure to prevent entry of water, or failure to comply with specified requirements.

1. This warranty shall not cover formation of cracks or defects in substrate materials adjacent to the seal, joint movement in excess of movement rating of sealant, or physical damage caused by others.

2. Repair or replace defective materials, fabrication, and installation during warranty period without expense to Owner, including removal and replacement of other items as required.

3. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

4. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-5
C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer
agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Failure of the materials, fabrication, and installation include leakage, hardening, cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinkage or running of the sealant or caulking, or the staining of adjacent materials.

E. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated.

2.3 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
A. Exterior Silicone Weatherproofing and Control Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, also ASTM C1193 and tested under ASTM C719; Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, low-modulus, non-sag sealant, use at exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as but not limited to:

1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 790.
b. Pecora Corporation; 890.

B. Reglets
and Flashings Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A, and O; single component elastomeric.

1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 795.
b. Pecora Corporation; 895NST.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Spectrem 2.

C. Weather Barrier Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, neutral-cure, single- component elastomeric; ASTM C719 +/- 25 movement.

1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 758.

2.4 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
A. Interior Weatherproofing and Control Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging type; color as selected; use in interior surfaces such as, but not limited to:

1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex 1a.
c. BASF (Sonneborne); NP 1.
d. Tremco; Dymonic FC.

B. Interior Latex Joint Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C834, Type S, Use O, Grade NS; use at interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited to:

1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.
b. BASF (Sonneborn); Sonolac.
c. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

C. Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; Use NT, G, A, and O; use on non-porous interior surfaces under high humidity and temperature extremes.

For use in bathrooms, spas, and similar applications where joints need protection against fungi and bacteria.

1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
b. Pecora, Inc. 898.
c. Tremco, Inc Tremsil 200.

D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90; use for drywall or plaster wall systems, bedding electrical boxes and other wall outlets.

1. Acceptable Sealants: One of the following or approved equal:
a. Pecora Corporation; AIS 919 Acoustical and Insulation Latex Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.5 JO

INT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings and accessory materials, including primers, of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Foam Joint Fillers: Non-gassing, preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non- waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible plastic foam of one of materials indicated below, as recommended by manufacturer for compatibility with their sealant; of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth, prevent three-sided adhesion, provide a surface against which to tool, and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Flexible cellular rubber tubing complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from pre-construction joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests. Certify that primer will not permanently stain adjacent joint surfaces.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints, to mask off adjacent joint surfaces where sealant is not permanently intended to be applied.

D. Bondbreaker Tape: Polyethylene pressure sensitive adhesive tape, to be used in areas where backer rod cannot fit and where three-sided adhesion is to be avoided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance.

C. Verify joint dimensions and shapes to ensure they are within the sealant manufacturers guidelines. Resolve any variances prior to installation. Do not proceed with sealant installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean the areas that the new sealant will contact using a de-greasing solvent not harmful to the environment using the two-rag wipe technique. IPA (isopropyl alcohol) is not a degreasing solvent. The new sealant should have a minimum contact area of 1/4.

B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed ceramic tile.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 JOINT PRIMING
A. Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on pre-construction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Allow primer to dry. Do not prime areas that cannot be sealed the same day.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-9

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT BACKINGS
A. Install
joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.

3. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.

E. Install joint backing to maintain the following joint ratios, but in no case less than 1/4 inch (6 mm):

1. Joints up to 1/2 inch wide: 1:1 width to depth ratio.

2. Joints Greater than 1/2 inch wide: 2:1 width to depth ratio; maximum 1/2 inch joint depth.

3. Sub-caulk joints that are deep, or joints without suitable backstop, to proper depth.

4. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of caulking) with bond breaker tape.

5. Install with adhesive on 2 faces in contact with sides of joints.

F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C1193.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants and sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

C. Construction
Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.

B. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 07 9200
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-1
SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Standard steel doors and frames for interior and exterior locations; service doors for storage, mechanical and support spaces as indicated and scheduled on Drawings.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

B. Section 09 9100 Painting: Finish painting of steel items.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. Metal thicknesses indicated below correspond to former gauge thicknesses:

1. 20 Gauge: 0.032-inch (0.8-mm).

2. 18 Gauge: 0.042-inch (1.0-mm).

3. 16 Gauge: 0.053-inch (1.3-mm).

4. 14 Gauge: 0.067-inch (1.7-mm).

5. 12 Gauge: 0.093-inch (2.3-mm).

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

4. Show anchorage and other requirements.

5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-2
B. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

1.7 QU

ALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames", ANSI A250, and as specified herein.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.

C. Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by Underwriter Laboratory maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies accordance with limits of manufacturers listing.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.

B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating custom steel frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for custom steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

2.1 MA

NUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, or approved equal:

1. Assa Abloy/Ceco Door Products.

2. Assa Abloy/Curries Company.

3. Allegion/ Republic Doors and Frames

4. Allegion/Steelcraft Doors and Frames.

2.2 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.

Comply with ANSI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel.

2. Non-Rated Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors complying with ANSI A250.8.

3. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (1.057 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
a. Locations: Exterior doors and interior doors where indicated.

4. Fire Door Core Construction: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.

5. Vertical Edges, for Single- and Double-Acting Doors: Square edge.

6. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

7. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

1. Fabricate from cold-rolled steel sheet.

2. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) or Model 2 (Seamless) composite construction where indicated on Drawings.

3. Material: Steel sheet, 0.042-inch (1.0 mm) thick.

4. Cores: Manufacturers standard as required for each type of rated and non-rated door and that meets rating requirements.

2.3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior frame requirements.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints.

2. Frames for Level 1 and Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

3. Frames for Level 3 and Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.

4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

5. Frames for Borrowed Lights:

0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Fire Rated Units: Construct assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when door frames are in installed, opened position.

2. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.

3. Temperature Rise Rating: Provide doors with maximum 450°F Temperature Rise Rating in 30 minute fire exposure period at doors into exit enclosures.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to comply with the following minimum sizes:

1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.

2. Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.

3. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick.

4. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick.

E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.

F. Jamb Anchors:

1. Metal Stud Anchor: Z-type anchor, welded to frame, 0.053-inch thick steel, UL listed as required for fire rating.

G. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Used at all frames installed prior to walls. Where frames are installed after walls, install an additional jamb anchor within the lowest 6-inches of the door jamb, one each side.

2. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

3. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A653/A653M, with ASTM A924/A924M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-5
C. Door Louvers: SDI 111C, sight proof, inverted V or Y blades, with insect screen at exterior doors, size as indicated on Drawings.

Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated.

G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 8100.

2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch (16 mm) high, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.

B. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.

3. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel. Install insulation in doors where scheduled on Drawings.

4. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gauge inverted steel channels. Seal joints watertight.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
a. All exterior frame joints shall be fully welded and watertight.

2. Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints
, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from cold-rolled or hot- rolled steel (at fabricator's option).

7. Provide 3/8-inch back bend return on frames where gypsum board wall material occurs whether on one or both sides.

8. Fabricate frames having multiple openings with mullion members having no visible seams or joints. Continuously weld face, rabbet, and soffit joints between abutted members and finish smooth when exposed to exterior.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

6. Factory-install glass in prepared openings.

F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. Paint heads to match adjacent surfaces.

G. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

1. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute.

2. Prepare frames for silencers except for frames which receive weatherstripping.

3. Provide dust cover boxes or mortar guards of 0.016-inch-thick steel at all hardware mortises on frames.

4. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site.

H. Attach fire rated label to each rated frame and door unit.

I. Factory-install louvers in prepared openings.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. General:

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.

B. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm).

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A510/A510M may be used in place of steel sheet.

B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A153/A153M, Class C or D as applicable.

C. Shop Applied Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, air-drying or baking type, suitable as a base for specified finish paints.

D. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.

E. Gaskets:

1. Inner Gasket: Surface-mounted to inside of frame stop with compressible bulb to engage interior face of door at all four sides.

2. Outer Gasket: Surface adhered to face of frame stop with silicone bulb and integral adhesive strip to engage interior face of door at all four sides.

F. Finish: Paint in accordance with Section 09 9100.

3.1 EXAM

INATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel doors and frames.

1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of steel frame connections before frame installation.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.

C. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of ANSI A250.11 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.

D. Except for frames located at in-place concrete and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

E. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.

F. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.
d. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post- installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.

4. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the foll
owing tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

G. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

H. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) oc, and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) oc from each corner.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after installation.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 08 1113
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-10
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 08 1116-1
SECTION 08 1116 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior aluminum storefront window system in privacy rooms only (Meeting Room, Group Study Rooms, and Collaboration Zone).

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Steel doors and door frames.

B. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.

C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

D. Section 08 8100 Glass Glazing.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of aluminum frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum framing of similar design and extent to those required for the project and authorized by manufacturer to install products specified in this Section.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum frames from one source and from a single manufacturer.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 08 1116-2
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of interior aluminum
frames and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.

Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.

B. Inspect frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking.

Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers become wet, remove carton immediately.

D. Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.

B. Carbon Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A36/A36M for structural shapes, plates and bars; ASTM A1008/A1008M for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A570 for hot rolled sheet and strip.

C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: ASTM A123/A123M, aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip, zinc-coated steel.

D. Exposed Fasteners: Use exposed fasteners (Phillips flat-head screws) only to apply hardware.

Match the finish of the member or hardware being fastened.

2.2 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS
A. Stile-and-Rail Type Interior Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.

B. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design as follows.

1. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.

C. Hardware:

1. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

2. Locking Devices, General: Do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

3. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

4. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

5. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
a. Standard: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

6. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08710; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

7. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing.

8. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

9. Removable Mullions:
a. Standard: BHMA A156.3.
b. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used.

10. Closers: With accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use, and adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. a. Standard: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

11. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.

12. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper.

13. Door Seals: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. a. Compression Type for Rated Conditions: Made of ASTM D2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D2287, molded PVC.
b. Sliding Type for Non-rated Conditions: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

2.3 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT WINDOW SYSTEM

2.4 Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the interior aluminum window and sidelight frames is based on the manufacturer identified below. Product requirements in this Section are based on products by the named manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or an approved comparable system:

1. Basis-of-Design: Kawneer Company, Inc.; TriFab 451.

2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.

3. Or accepted equivalent.

2.5 Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

2. Glazing Plane: Front.

3. STC: 42 minimum at Privacy Rooms.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 08 1116-4
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and acc
essories compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Glazing: See Section 08 8100.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle, to shapes as required for each application, for knock down field assembly.

B. Clearly identify work before shipment to assure proper assembly at project site.

C. Provide metal frames for doors and other openings, of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide wool pile or gasketing in door frames to prevent metal-to-metal contact.

D. Fasteners and Hardware: Aluminum, stainless steel, or other non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminum and acceptable to frame manufacturer, countersunk style.

Exposed fasteners not permitted.

E. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

F. Fabricate frame members mortised, drilled and tapped for hinge and strike locations.

G. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute.

H. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for sag resistance and rigidity.

I. Door Seals: Provide continuous, nylon backed wool pile sound and light seal around perimeter of doorstop.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 08 1116-5
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thicknes
s of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: Custom, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as herein specified.

B. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement.

C. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

D. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per door jamb at hinge and strike levels.

In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.

E. Field cut jamb legs if required to fit actual finished opening dimension.

3.2 SIDELIGHT INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing to comply with Section 088100 for glazed lights.

B. Install reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.

C. Accurately join, fit and reinforce corners to flush hairline joints.

3.3 INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration.

B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels.

1. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

C. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact mortar, concrete, or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfac
es with bituminous paint.

3. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.

D. Install frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as herein specified.

E. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement.

F. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

G. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per door jamb at hinge and strike levels.

In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.

H. Field cut jamb legs if required to fit actual finished opening dimension.

I. Refer to Section 08 8100 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into framing and doors that are not pre-glazed by manufacturer.

1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

2. Install structural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured.

4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured.

J. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 9200 unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with the installation of aluminum entrance doors and frames.

B. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and levels without warp or rack.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
a. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 087100 for installation requirements.
b. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

C. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to surrounding construction.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 08 1116-7
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances aligning wit
h adjacent work.

3.5 WOOD DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Fit wood doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in NAAWS Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 9.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating conditions.

B. Adjust operating hardware.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean completed systems promptly after erection taking care to avoid damage to finishes.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 08 1116
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES 08 1116-8
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-1
SECTION 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Solid core wood doors, rated and non-rated.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 7100 Door Hardware: Installation of hardware in wood doors.

B. Section 08 8100 Glass Glazing: Glass for glazed wood doors.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings.

1. Include adhesive and composite wood materials manufacturers' product data indicating urea-formaldehyde content.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

4. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.

C. Samples for Verification: Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.

D. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-2

1.7 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Source
Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Comply with the current edition of the "North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 3.0, United States Version" for requirements in the door grades indicated.

C. NAAWS Quality Standard: Comply with the specified grade(s) of doors indicated for construction, finishes, and installation, specified section(s), and applicable requirements of the current edition of the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" by AWI and WI.

1. Provide WI-certified compliance labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

E. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Door label shall include hourly rating followed by the letter S indicating conformance with air leakage resistance testing, serial number, and the listing agencys certification mark.

F. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures and exitways, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. In addition to the requirements specified for positive pressure test requirements specified above, the door label shall include temperature rise rating.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-3
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3- inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of the original installation, including costs of re-hanging.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods.

2. Eggers Industries.

3. Marshfield Door Systems.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. General Wood Door Product Requirements: Provide doors with same exposed surface material on both faces of each door; meeting requirements of NAAWS Section 9; unless otherwise indicated.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. Adhesives: NWWDA IS-1.6, Type II adhesive bond or better for cores, Type I adhesive bond for faces and cross bands. Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.

2.3 INTERIOR DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. General Wood Door Product Requirements: Provide doors with same exposed surface material on both faces of each door; meeting requirements of NAAWS Section 9 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interior, Solid-Core, Veneer-Faced Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

2. Adhesive: Type I or Type II

3. Core: Particleboard at non-rated conditions, mineral-core at rated conditions.

4. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).

5. Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced quarter-sliced. a. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
b. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. c. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
d. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building.
e. Corridor Match: Corridor door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 20 feet (6 m) or more.

6. Stiles: Same species as faces.

7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-4
a. Heavy Duty: At office, stairwell, mechanical service, hallway, storage doors. b. Extra Heavy Duty:

At public bathrooms, assembly areas, and kitchens.

8. Finish: Stained to match Architects sample.

C. Particleboard Cores:

1. Core (Solid, Non-Rated): NAAWS Section 9, HPVA Grade A, particleboard core.

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1.
a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

3. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates.
c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

4. Provide doors with glued-block cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.

D. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core (Solid, Fire Rated): NAAWS Section 9, HPVA Grade A, noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows:
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking.
b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. d. 4-1/2-by-10-inch (114-by-250-mm) lock blocks.
e. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory-pre-fit and pre-machine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated and complying with NAAWS pre-fitting tolerances.

B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with NAAWS Architectural Woodwork Standards and to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door.

C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer as required for hardware reinforcement.

D. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Hardwood of species compatible in color with veneer facing for transparent finish; hardwood for paint finish.

E. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-5
F. Fire Rated Doors: Of rating specified; construction shall be manufacturers standard, conforming to
the requirements of the applicable labeling agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction for the label specified.

1. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.

2. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
a. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

G. Prepare fire rated doors as required by NFPA 80, for locks, latches, hinges, remotely operated or monitored hardware, concealed closures, glass lights, vision panels, louvers, astragals and laminated overlays in conformance with the manufacturers licensing and label service agreement.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom.

2. NAAWS Finish System 2: Score 99-T, lacquer pre-catalyzed.

3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.

4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough openings are correct before proceeding.

B. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood doors and fire-rated wood door frames will be installed.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.

2. Reject doors with defects.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions, in accordance with NAAWS Section 9 requirements.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-6
B. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces afte
r fitting and machining.

C. Do not impair utility or structural strength of doors in fitting to the opening, in applying hardware, preparing lights, louvers, or plant-ons or other detailing.

D. Fire-Rated Doors: Install in fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80.

1. Do not remove labels from fire rated doors.

E. Install pre-fit and pre-machined doors in accordance with manufacturers data. Install with a maximum clearance of 1/8 inch on the lock side, 1/8 inch between meeting edges of paired doors and 1/8 inch between top of door and frame header.

F. If not pre-machined, use a minimum of 1 hinge for each 30 inches of door height. Equally space hinges when using 3 or more.

G. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

1. Fitting Clearances:
a. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/4 3/8-inch (6 9.5 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.
c. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold.
d. Fire-rated Doors: As specified in CBC Section 715 and NFPA 80.

H. Doors may not extend beyond 1/16 inch from the face of the jamb nor more than 1/8 inch behind jamb face.

I. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

J. Cutouts, Recesses, and Exposed Rail Edges: Unless factory provided, paint with two coats of clear sealer, each coat well dried, before hardware is set in place.

K. Meeting stiles of pairs of doors shall be in alignment along the entire height, and offset between adjacent leaves shall not exceed 1/8-inch

3.3 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced movement.

B. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-7

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean
glass and hardware units promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed units to ensure that they are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 08 1416
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416-8
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACCESS DOORS 08 3113-1
SECTION 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Access panels and doors in walls.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 9100 Painting: Finish painting for metal surfaces.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate type(s) of doors to be installed for wall and ceiling conditions, special installation requirements, finishes, closing mechanisms, and hardware.

B. Location Drawing: Required access doors may not be indicated on the Drawings. Show proposed location of every required access door with dimensions in plan and elevation. Verify locations with the Architect. Access doors shall be located within walls and ceilings for access including but not limited to the following: automatic valves, automatic dampers, air terminal units, and fire/smoke dampers. Show location of adjacent materials, trim pieces, and hardware required to complete the work. Do not begin installation until location is approved. Submit access door locations superimposed on piping layout and duct layout shop drawings

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. Babcock-Davis.

2. J.L. Industries.

3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel with baked-on, rust inhibitive primer.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACCESS DOORS 08 3113-2
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Cold-Rolled
Steel Sheets: ASTM A36/A36M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A620/A620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A568/A568M. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A591/A591M, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

2.3 ACCESS DOORS
A. Furnish access doors of proper size for access to concealed equipment. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum size shall be 12-inch x 12-inch for hand access and minimum 18-inch x 18-inch for valve and actuator access and 24-inch x 24-inch for equipment access.

B. Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Flanges: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces or fire-rated and sound-rated construction.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: One hour for ceilings and one and one-half hours for walls.

3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.

4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (0.9 mm).

5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-inch (25-mm) wide, surface-mounted trim.

6. Finish: Phosphate dipped with baked-on rust inhibiting primer for field painting as specified in Section 09 9100.

7. Insulation: 2-inch thick fire-rated insulation sandwiched between two pieces of 20- gauge steel.

8. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.

9. Automatic Closer: Spring type.

10. Hardware: Self-latching bolt with automatic closer and interior latch release.

11. Latch/Lock: Ball bearing cylinder lock operated by a recessed flush key lock. Panels shall have interior latch release mechanism allowing the door to be unlocked from the inside. Provide keyed locks at access doors located in public areas.

12. At sound-rated construction, seal door flanges with Pemko S88 smoke seals at perimeter, color that most closely matches adjacent finished surfaces. Seal entire assembly to gypsum board with acoustical sealant specified in Section 07 9200.

C. Flush, Non-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Flanges: Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces in Toilet Rooms, Custodial Rooms, and other Wet Areas.

2. Stainless-Steel Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage, No. 4 finish, set flush with exposed face flange of frame.

3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-inch (25-mm wide, surface-mounted trim.

4. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.

5. Hardware: Screwdriver-operated cam latch.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACCESS DOORS 08 3113-3
D. GRG Units for Drywall Ceilings in Occupied/Public locations:

1. Product: Chic
ago Metallic; GRG Access Doors; 8500 Series.

2. Type: Lay-in panels; screwed to ceiling grid.

3. Access Door: Rounded edges.

4. Shell Thickness: 1/8 to 3/16.

5. Fastener Test Pull Out (Metal Stud): 215 lb avg.

6. Fastener Push-Through Test: 350 lb avg.

7. Fuel Contribution: ASTM E84; 0.

8. Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 0.

9. Smoke Index: ASTM E84; 0.

10. Combustion: ASTM E84; Non-combustible.

11. Class A Non-Rated.

2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 inch (25 mm) wide around perimeter of frame.

2. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in plaster and drywall construction and to attach masonry anchors in masonry construction.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

1. For keyed latches, furnish two keys per latch and key all latches alike.

2.5 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." B. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:

1. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications.

2. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

C. Stainless-Steel Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

2. Polished Finish: No. 4 finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

3.1 PREPA
RATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.

B. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction.

C. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors.

B. Set frames accurately in position, mud edges, and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish.

C. Coordinate location of access doors in hung ceilings, furred spaces and walls to provide access to concealed work items requiring maintenance and/or adjustment. Obtain approval of the Architect for the locations of such access doors.

D. Locate and group equipment requiring access doors. Coordinate location of equipment with other trades to minimize number of access doors in one area.

E. Frames, doors and trim pieces shall not vary from straightness or snug contact fit by more than 1/16-inch.

F. Provide access doors for maintenance or adjustment purposes for mechanical system components, including but not limited to the following:

1. Valves.

2. Dampers.

3. Concealed equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and clean hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean and prepare doors for painting in accordance with Section 09 9100.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 08 3113
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-1
COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300

GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

Electrically operated access-controlled egress rolling grilles that provide alarm and fail-safe automatic opening emergency response and automatic locking capabilities.

B. Related Sections:

1. 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications. Door opening jamb and head members.

2. 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry. Door opening jamb and head members.

3. Division 26. Electrical wiring and conduit, fuses, disconnect switches, connection of operator to power supply, and installation of control station and wiring.

C. Products That May Be Supplied, But Are Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Control station.

2. IBC/ANSI A117 compliant Emergency Exit Push-Button Station and Signage.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Cycle Life:

1. Standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycle per day maximum

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures; submit the following items:

1. Product Data.

2. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work.

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Provide manufacturer ISO 9001:2015 registration.
b. Provide manufacturer and installer qualifications
c. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.

4. Closeout Submittals:
a. Operation and Maintenance Manual.
b. Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2015 registered and a minimum of five years experience in producing rolling grille products.

2. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's approval.

1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Reference Section 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements.

B. Follow manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.

B. Maintenance: Submit for owners consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for installed products.

2.1 MANUFACTUR
ER
A. Manufacturer

1. Cornell: 24 Elmwood Avenue, Mountain Top, PA 18707 Telephone: (800) 233-8366 B. Alternates:

1. Cookson

2. Clopay

2.2 PRODUCT INFORMATION
A. Model: ERG10

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Curtain (Rods & Chains):

1. Horizontal Rods: Solid 5/16 inch diameter, 5056 H32 aluminum alloy a. Vertical Spacing: 2 inches on center

2. Vertical Chains: Eyeletted aluminum links, 3/4 inch wide, positioned by E-rings on 9 inch centers. Provide double E-rings on horizontal bars on both sides of end chains to retain curtain in guides.

B. Curtain and Bottom Bar:

1. Fabrication & Finish:
a. Clear anodized
C. Guides:

1. Mounting:
a. Wall Mounted: Heavy duty extruded aluminum sections with snap-on cover to conceal fasteners and polypropylene pile runners on both sides of curtain.

Provide aluminum mounting angle as required for face of wall installation.

2. Finish:
a. Clear anodized
D. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly:

1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot of width.

2. Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed and balanced for fail-safe automatic opening of grille. Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.

E. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 1/4 inch steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures.

1. Finish:
a. Powder Coat: Zirconium treatment followed by a gray baked-on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils cured film thickness
F. Hood: 0.040 inch aluminum with reinforced top and bottom edges

1. Finish:
a. Clear anodized
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-3

2.4 OPERATION
A. AlarmGard
Series Motor Operated: Model FS, UL listed, NEMA 1 enclosure rating, horsepower as recommended by manufacturer, 115v single phase service. Provide open drip-proof motor, removable without affecting setting of limit switches; UL listed thermal overload protection; solenoid brake; planetary reduction gearing and rotary limit switches; transformer with 24 v control secondary; and all integral electrical components prewired to terminal blocks.

1. Automatic open feature shall be activated by central smoke/fire alarm system, emergency exit push-button station or power failure.

2. Upon release of solenoid brake, grille shall open automatically without the use of electric power maintaining an average speed of not less than 6 nor more than 9 per second.

3. System shall not require any type of battery power source.

4. Grille shall be fail-safe and open upon power failure.

5. Upon restoration of power and clearing of the alarm signal or resetting of emergency exit push-button station, grille shall be immediately ready for normal operation by use of the control station.

6. The electrical contractor shall mount the control station, emergency exit push-button station, local horn/strobe alarm for emergency exit push-button station and supply the appropriate disconnect switch, all conduit and wiring per the overhead door wiring instructions.
a. Emergency Exit Push-Button Station with Keyed Reset and Signage that reads Push To Exit
B. Control Station:

1. Flush mounted: "Open/Close" key switch with "Best" core cylinder; NEMA 1B C. Control Operation:

1. Momentary contact to close:

Fail- safe, UL325-2010 Compliant Entrapment Protection for Motor Operation a. SafetyGard UL325 Light Curtain with Dynamic Sequential Blanking: Provide monitored, non-contact light curtain consisting of a transmitter and a receiver to be mounted to the guide assembly of the door in the provided mounting channel, projecting a thru beam across the width of the door for the height of the light curtain (3ft or 6ft depending on opening size of the door). Interruption of beam before door fully closes shall cause door to immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to the fully opened position
b. SmartSync Wireless Edge Kit continuously monitored, wireless sensing/weather edge seal extending full width of door bottom bar. Contact before door fully closes shall cause door to immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to the fully opened position. Wireless edge kit will use Zigbee wireless technology. Radio band wireless sensing edges will not be permitted

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Locking:

1. Concealed Self Locking Mechanism: AutoLock manual lifting jamb lock assemblies that will prevent forced opening of a closed grille. Lock mechanism shall not interfere with normal electric operation, fail-safe or emergency response self opening features.

B. Operator and Bracket Mechanism Cover: Material and finish to match door hood.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-4
C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A.

General: Install grille and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and supports.

B. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust grilles for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Test: Test grilles for normal operation and the emergency opening feature by means of alarm, power failure and emergency exit push-button station at door opening. Coordinate with Authority Having Jurisdiction to witness test.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative.

B. Provide the Owner Representative with detailed instructions for maintenance procedures and to address the annual testing requirement of the grilles.

END OF SECTION
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-5
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-1
SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-Framed Windows, Entrances and Storefronts:

1. Aluminum-framed window openings.

2. Miscellaneous aluminum work, including wall panels, column covers, window sills, sill extensions, mullion caps, and other items.

B. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealants around installed storefront system.

B. Section 08 1116 Interior Aluminum Door and Window Frames.

C. Section 08 7100 Door Hardware: Installation of lock cylinders, automatic door operator at Front Door.

D. Section 08 8100 Glass Glazing.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including:

1. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.

2. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.

3. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.

B. Shop Drawings: For each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including layout and installation details, relationship to adjacent work, elevations at 1/4-inch scale, detail sections of typical composite members, anchors and reinforcement, hardware mounting heights, and glazing details.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. CALGreen Submittals:

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Finish Material Pollutant Control; Adhesives, Sealants, and Caulks: For adhesives, sealants, and caulks, including printed statement of VOC content.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-2
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made
from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.

3. Expansion provisions.

4. Glazing.

5. Flashing and drainage.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.

2. Include design calculations.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: Copy of special manufacturer's and Installers warranties stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-3
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of aluminum entrances and storefront systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

D. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer.

F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, without Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data comparing proposed substitution to named system, with substitution request to Architect for review.

G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging.

B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete.

Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.

C. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field
Measurements: Verify storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating storefront components without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Installers Warranty: Installer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace glazing systems that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazed storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following:

1. Structural loads.

2. Thermal movements.

3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.

5. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-5
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to gl
azing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure.

B. Primary Building Structure: Designed for vertical and lateral loads only, and not to resist torsional stresses induced by entrance and storefront systems.

1. Strength: Design system to withstand loads as required by California Building Code.

C. Performance Requirements: At a minimum provide the following:

1. Strength: Design system to withstand loads as required by California Building Code but not less than following minimum loading.
a. Wind: Uniform inward and outward wind pressures based on 120 mph wind speed, Exposure C; pressures as calculated per current code requirements. b. Seismic: Conform with applicable codes. Size, fabricate, assemble and erect work to accommodate interstory drift (horizontal displacement) during a major seismic event. Interstory drift values for this building are calculated as follows:
1) Maximum Ds (delta S) displacement values vary, but do not exceed ¼ on any floor.
2) Dm (delta M) values are as calculated per current code requirements. c. Building Deflections: Size primary members to accommodate building deflections. Fabricate, assemble and erect work to accommodate following limitations:
1) Post-tensioned concrete slabs: Allow for vertical deflection. Calculated vertical deflection is 3/8-inches up or down beginning immediately following slab construction.
2) Metal Framed Openings: Allow for live load deflection. Calculated vertical floor displacement under live loading is L/700 at joists and non- bearing locations.

2. Window System Deflections and Thermal Movements: Size primary members for temperature variations as follows; fabricate, assemble and erect work to maintain limitations.
a. Design for normal-to-wall deflection of L/175 of span; except L/250 of span for glass supporting members.
b. Parallel-to-wall deflection of less than 75% of glass edge clearances. c. Thermal expansion and contraction movements resulting from not less than ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, which may cause a material temperature range of 160 degrees F.

3. Water and Air Leakage: Installed system shall be free of leakage of both water and air. a. Water leakage is defined as uncontrolled penetration of water (not including condensation) to interior of building.
b. Air leakage is defined as infiltration of air at any area of window wall, at a rate in excess of 0.06 cfm/sf of area, based on measurement of single complete module of system.

4. Condensation: Provide minimum tested Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) of 45.

5. Energy Performance: Provide minimum U-Factor value of 0.57 for glazed window wall system, including frame, glazing and operable windows and doors.

6. Glazing:
a. Solar
Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.
b. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC- certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the aluminum-framed entrances and storefront is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Basis-of-Design: Kawneer North America TriFab 451T.

2. Arcadia.

3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.

4. Accepted equivalent.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209/B209M.

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221/B221M.

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429.

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36.

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M.

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123.

1. Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non-corrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.

D. Fasteners: Provide corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components and adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

3. Where exposed fasteners are unavoidable, use countersunk Phillips screw heads, finis
hed to match framing system.

4. Exposed fasteners must have bonded neoprene washers or be sealed.

E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch- thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components and adjacent materials.

2.4 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. System: Kawneer TriFab 451T, 2 x 4-1/2, or accepted equivalent.

2. Construction: Thermally-broken.

3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

4. Glazing Plane: Front glazed.

5. Framing: Shear-block system.

6. Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer, custom color as selected by Architect.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Metal Thickness: 3/16-inch

2. Stile Design: Medium stile; 5-1/2 by 1-3/4-inches. Narrow stiles not acceptable.

3. Head Rail: 6-1/2 by 1-3/4-inches.

4. Bottom Rails: 12-1/2-inches.

5. Hardware Reinforcement: 1/4-inch-thick metal material

6. Finish: Match storefront.

7. Door hardware shall match make and style as specified, submitted and approved for all doors in project scope. Provide from Aluminum Door supplier a hardware submittal for review by Owner.
a. Hinges shall be pivot or continuous geared type; manufactures: Select Products, Roton, or equal.
b. Concealed head closer, unless otherwise noted in hardware schedule. Floor type closers are not acceptable.

8. All doors and frames shall accommodate insulated glazing.

9. Finish: Clear anodized or Kynar color coating.

10. Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods or j-bolts.

11. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

12. Equip each door leaf with an adjusting mechanism located in the top rail near the lock stile, which provides for minor clearance adjustments after installation.

B. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250
g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8100 Glass Glazing.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Color: Black.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Glass to Mullion Sealant Color: Black.
c. Butt-joint Glass Sealant Color: Clear.

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.
a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Color: Matching structural sealant.

F. Secondary Sealants and Joint Fillers: For use as weatherseal at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems, compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact, as listed in Section 079200.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.7 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125- inch- (3.2-mm-)
thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members.

Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods or j-bolts.

B. Miscellaneous Brake Shapes: Provide headers, closures, anchors and supports as indicated and required. Fabricate from minimum 0.090-inch aluminum unless otherwise indicated.

C. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100.

2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 07 9200.

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

1. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing.

2. Provide sub-frames and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system.

3. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the Drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.

B. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations.

1. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finished surfaces.

2. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. Restore mechanical finish.

C. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

D. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required gl
azing edge clearances.

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

8. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.

E. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

F. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

G. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. Stick framing is not permitted.

H. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.

2. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.

3. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

4. Provide for wiring within framing system to accommodate power-operated hardware.

Include cutouts, raceways, conduits, and other such provisions to permit a complete operating hardware system.

I. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops.

3. At exterior doors, provide automatic door bottom applied to door bottoms.

4. Pre-glaze door units to greatest extent possible.

J. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

1. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at Project Site.

K. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

L. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a non-absorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead.

2.10 FINISHES
A. General:

Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish (FP-1): 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect.

2.11 STEEL REINFORCEMENT PRIMING
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer.

B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.

C. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration.

6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels.

1. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

C. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact mortar, concrete, or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

3. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.

D. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.

E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8100.

1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.

Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack.

3. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
a. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

4. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 07 9200 to produce weathertight installation.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-13
J. Refer to Section 08 8100 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into framing and doors
that are not pre-glazed by manufacturer.

2. Install structural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured.

4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured.

K. Install secondary-sealant weatherseal according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to provide weatherproof joints. Install joint fillers behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

L. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants, unless otherwise indicated.

M. Install operable window units in storefront system where indicated on Drawings in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Ensure proper connections and seals for a complete, weathertight system.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owners Representative will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.

1. Structural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to recommendations in ASTM C1401.
a. Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," in ASTM C1401, Appendix X2, shall be used.
1) A minimum of six areas on each building face shall be tested. 2) Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

2. Structural-Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum-framed systems is complete, structural-sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to recommendations in ASTM C1401.

3. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E1105, E331, and E547 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static- air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.

4. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-14
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of repla
ced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Water Penetration Test: After completion of the installation and nominal curing of sealants, test entrances and storefronts for water leaks in accordance with ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 4.18 lbf/sq. ft. (200 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.

B. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Conduct tests in presence of Architect and Owners Representative. Correct deficiencies observed as a result of this test.

D. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure.

1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3- second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

B. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-15
C. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in Section 08 8100 for
cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 08 4113
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113-16
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08 4230-1
SECTION 08 4230 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior single-sliding, automatic entrance door assemblies at Event Lounge and Community Lounge.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware to the extent not specified in this Section.

B. Section 08 8100 Glazing: Materials and installation requirements of glazing for automatic entrance doors.

C. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic entrance door operators.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door.

B. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks and recessed control mats that control automatic entrance doors. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Templates: Obtain and distribute, to the parties involved, templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrance doors. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic entrance doors to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies and security access control system.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrance doors.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08 4230-2
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to othe
r work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of emergency-exit automatic entrance door, signed by product manufacturer.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, certified inspector, and professional engineer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for automatic entrance door assemblies.

D. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For door operators and control systems to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Warranties: Executed special warranties specified in this Section.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Project Acceptance, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance door assembly Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance door assembly operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Engage a certified inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair, and at end of maintenance period. Submit completed inspection form to City Representative.

2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who employs a certified inspector.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM.

D. Engineeri
ng Responsibility: Prepare data for sliding automatic entrance doors, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer.

F. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
H. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.

I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

J. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress.

K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to automatic entrance doors including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review structural load limitations.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

4. Review scheduling to ensure minimal disruption of tenant merchant business.

1.11 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.12 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrance door assemblies that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08 4230-4
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering us
e.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period.

Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide automatic entrance doors that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

D. Operating Range: Minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) to 130 deg F (54 deg C).

E. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 cfm/sq. ft. (6.4 L/s x sq. m) of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

F. Opening-Force Requirements:

1. Egress Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width.

2. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

G. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent door from closing.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the sliding automatic entrances is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Basis-of-Design: Stanley GreenStar Duraglide 2000 bi-parting with partial breakout.

2. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.

3. Horton.

2.3 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation.

B. Sliding Automatic Entrance Door:

1. Configuration: Bi-parting doors, with two sliding leaves and two sidelites. a. Traffic Pattern: Two way.
b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Partial breakout (center two leaf break out; sidelights fixed).
c. Mounting: Between jambs Surface.

2. Activation Device: Motion detector mounted on each side of door header to detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.

3. Safety Devices: Two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.

4. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with powdercoat finish matching adjacent curtain wall finish matching adjacent storefront. a. Color: Match storefront and curtain wall.

2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.

2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.

3. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 07 9200.

C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M; of consistency suitable for application.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.76-mm) thickness per coat.

2.5 COMPONENTS
A. Framing and Transom Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum

0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wall thickness.

B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08 4230-6
Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods tha
t span full length of top and bottom rails.

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets.

2. Stile Design: Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch (90-mm) nominal width.

3. Rail Design: 10-inch (254-mm) nominal height.

C. Sidelites: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) deep sidelites with minimum 0.125- inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design.

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door.

D. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8100.

E. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance door units to conceal door operators, carrier assemblies, and roller tracks. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.

1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing.

2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb (79 kg) per leaf over spans up to 14 feet (4.3 m) without intermediate supports.
a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet (4.3 m).

F. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.

1. Rollers: Minimum two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each active leaf.

G. Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and bottom-guide track system, with stainless-steel ball-bearing-center roller wheels.

1. Configuration: No threshold across door opening, recessed, pin-guide track system at sidelites.

H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

J. Caution Sign: BHMA A156.10; 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high, black lettering on a yellow background with the words "CAUTION AUTOMATIC DOOR."
K. Emergency Breakaway Sign: BHMA A156.10; red background with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high contrasting letters with the words "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08 4230-7

2.6 DOOR OPERATORS
A. General:

Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.

1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind pressures.

B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead unit powered by fractional- horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation including spring closing with power off.

1. Operation: Power opening and power closing.

2. Features:
a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
b. Adjustable backcheck and latching.
c. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds.
d. Obstruction recycle.
e. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator. f. Energy conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. g. Software: Incorporates self-diagnosing system

3. Mounting: Concealed.

2.7 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Combination Motion/Presence Detectors: Self-contained units; consisting of both motion and presence detectors in a single metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10.

1. Motion Detector: K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds.
a. Provide capability for switching between bi-directional and uni-directional detection.
b. For one-way-traffic entrance doors, detector on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

2. Presence Detector: Infrared-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds. Detectors shall remain active at all times.

B. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting.

Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.

D. Opening-Width Control Switch: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding doors to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial opening width.

2.8 HARDWARE
A. General:

Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.

B. Emergency Breakaway Hardware: Provide release hardware that allows panel to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any position in sliding mode. Maximum force to open panel shall be 50 lbf (222 N) according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of panel operator while in breakaway mode.

C. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn; with minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, six-pin mortise type. a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system.

2. Deadbolts: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

D. Automatic Locking: Electrically controlled device mounted in header that automatically locks door against sliding when in closed position. Provide fail secure operation if power fails.

1. Include concealed, vertical-rod exit devices, UL 305, with latching into threshold and overhead carrier assembly and released by full-width panic bar push paddle; and that prevent emergency breakout doors from swinging and permit emergency egress.

E. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components complying with AAMA 701; made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

F. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom.

2.9 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match framing.
a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08 4230-9
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,
assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.

1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads.

2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.

3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

4. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.

5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

6. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.

7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from the building structure.

8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.

C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.

D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.

E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual." F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

1. Provide sliding weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of sliding doors and breakaway sidelites.

G. Activation and Safety Devices: Factory install devices in doors and headers.

1. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as follows:
a. Top Beam: 48 inches (1219 mm).
b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches (610 mm).

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

1. Color: Match adjacent storefront system. See Section 08 4113.

C. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match adjacent storefront and curtain wall systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAM

INATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrance doors.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Seal joints watertight.

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

B. Entrances: Install automatic entrance doors plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.

1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support.

3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 26 Sections.

D. Activation and Safety Devices: Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions indicated.

E. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8100.

F. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07 9200 to provide weathertight installation.

1. Set framing members, thresholds, bottom-guide track system, and flashings in full sealant bed.

2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.

G. Signage: Provide caution signs on each automatic entrance door, visible from both sides of door. Mount caution signs with centerline 58 inches (1475 mm) above finished floor.

1. Emergency Breakaway Panels: Provide emergency breakaway sign visible to egress side of each automatic entrance door and sidelite that has emergency breakaway capability. Mount signs adjacent to lock stile with centerline between 36 and 60 inches (900 and 1525 mm) above finished floor.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspector:

City will engage a certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrance doors and prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Testing Services: Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.

1. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.

C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for weathertight closure, and complying with requirements in BHMA A156.10.

B. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts.

C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts.

D. Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Project Acceptance, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 08 8100 for cleaning and maintaining glass.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a certified inspector to train Citys maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrance doors and door operators.

END OF SECTION 08 4230
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08 4230-12
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 WINDOW GLAZING RETROFIT SECTION 08 5113-1
WINDOW GLAZING RETROFIT SECTION 08 5113
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMM
ARY
A. Section Includes: Window glazing retrofit
B. Relat
ed Sections:

1. Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 and the following specifications sections apply to this section.

2. Section 08 44 00 -Curtainwall and Glazed Assemblies

2. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows

1.02 REFERENCES
A. United States

1. ASTM 1036

1. ANSI Z97.1 American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety

2. ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.

3. ASTM C1376 Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Glass.

4. CSPC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

5. ISO 9001-2008 Certification.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements

1. Provide hermetically sealed, factory-manufactured, insulating glass units to the existing, inside surface of the exterior, single or monolithic glazing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 12-inch sample of each type of glass indicated.

B. Submit glass manufacturers product sheet and glazing instructions.

C. Submit sill extender if required
D. Mockup: A full system mockup is required prior to commencing commercial installation.

Mock up not to exceed 150 Square Feet.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain the Window retrofit system from the manufacturer with installation by a Certified Dealer/Installer only.

B. Provide a structural engineer analysis of existing framing system and building system to determine proper support prior to installation.

C. Provide water and air tests of existing framing system prior to installation.

D. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001-2008 Certified.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 WINDOW GLAZING RETROFIT SECTION 08 5113-2

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturers instruct
ion for receiving, handling, storing and protecting retrofit system and glazing materials.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Exercise care to prevent damage to glass and damage/deterioration to coating on glass.

1.08 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not install glazing when interior glass surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 C) B. Field Measurement: Verify field measurements with drawing dimensions prior to fabrication of window retrofit system.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written 10-year limited material warranty from date of manufacture for retrofit glazing system.

B. Provide a two-year limited warranty on labor
PART 2 - GENERAL

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Renovate by Berkowitz

2. Approved equal

2.02 MATERIALS
A. WINDOW GLAZING RETROFIT SYSTEM
1) Outboard lite: Existing Glass
2) ½ Desiccated structural spacer with permanent Adhesive Sealant, Airspace 3) Middle Glass Type: 3/16 (5mm), Clear Guardian SN68 #4, Heat Treated or Guardian SN68 #4 Heat Treated, or equivalent
4) Airspace: ½ (12mm) Black 3Seal Spacer, 90% Argon filled 5) Inboard Lite: 3/16 (5mm) Clear Float, Heat Treated B. PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS:
1) Center of Glass. Computed with LBNL Windows 6.3. Assumes clear existing lite. a) R-Value 5.56 / SHGC 0.42
2) Provide hermetically sealed IG units with dehydrated airspace, dual air seal of black polyisobutelyene (PIB), and a secondary seal of black silicone.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verific
ations and Conditions

1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for the installation of the glass (see 1.06).

2. Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized within tolerance.

3. Verify that a functioning weep system is present.

4. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being followed.

5. Do not proceed with retrofit glazing until satisfactory conditions for temperature (see

1.08 A) have been followed and all film (if found) removed.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection

1. Approved certified Dealer/Installer to clean and prepare existing windows for acceptance of the window retrofit system

3.03 INSTALLATION

1. Dealer/Installer shall be Certified by Renovate by Berkowitz, LLC in accordance with Installation procedures

2. Do not install window retrofit system when inside glass surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove window film if previously installed
B. Pre- Installation- Clean components per the Renovate by Berkowitz, LLC installation program guidelines.

C. Glass to be cleaned according to:

1. GANA Glass Informational Bulletin GANA 01-0300 Proper Procedure for Cleaning Architectural Glass Products.

2. GANA Glass Informational Bulletin GANA TD-02-0402 Heat Treated Glass Surfaces are Different.
D. Do not use razor blades, scrapers or metal tools to clean glass.

END OF SECTIONS
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 WINDOW GLAZING RETROFIT SECTION 08 5113-4
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GEN
ERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawi
ngs and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.

2. Storefront and Entrance door hardware.

3. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping.

C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing.

1. Division 8: Section Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

2. Division 8: Section - Flush Wood Doors.

3. Division 8: Section - Aluminum Storefront.

4. Division 28: Section - Fire/Life-Safety Systems & Security Access Systems.

1.3 REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.) A. 2022 California Building Code, CCR, Title 24.

B. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
C. CCR California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards.

D. DHI Door and Hardware Institute
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
G. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General
: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.

B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Submit electronic copy of schedule organized vertically into Hardware Sets with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

Include following information:

1. Include a Cover Sheet with;
a. Job Name, location, telephone number.
b. Architects name, location and telephone number.
c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number. d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number. e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number.

2. Job Index information included;
a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number and page number.
b. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems and Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary schedule is submitted.
c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials. d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule. e. Mounting locations for hardware.
f. Clarification statements or questions.
g. Catalog cuts and manufacturers technical data and instructions.

3. Vertical schedule format sample:

Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number HW -1) (a) 1 Single Door #1 - Exterior from Corridor 101 (b) 90 (c) RH (d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x
HM
(g)
1 (h) (i) ea (j) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (l) ½ TMS
(m)
626 (n) IVE
2 6A
A 1 ea Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x
JTMS 626 SCH
(a) - Single or pair with opening number and location. (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand of door(s)
(d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness. (e) - Label requirements if any. (f) - Door by frame material. (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset Symbol. (i) - Quantity. (j) - Product description. (k) - Product Number. (l) - Fastenings and other pertinent information. (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) - Manufacture abbreviation.

D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be made prior to b
id date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-3
E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all electrical products listed in
the Hardware Schedule portion of this section.

F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the City's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule and transcript, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers installation and adjustment and maintenance information.

I. LEED Certification Points: Submit information and certifications necessary to achieve maximum points for LEED certification; coordinate and cooperate with Owner and Architect in providing information necessary for required LEED rating.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain
each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

2. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

To maintain the integrity of patented key systems provide a letter of authorization from the specified manufacturer indicating that supplier has authorization to purchase the key system directly from the manufacturer.

3. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods.

C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with five years documented experience.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.

1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".

E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.

F. Product packaging to be labelled in compliance with CA Prop 65, Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-4

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coord
inate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation.

B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work.

C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.

D. Contractor to inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each all are satisfied that count is correct.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers regular terms of sale from day of project acceptance as follows:

1. Locksets: Seven (7) years.

2. Electronic: One (1) year.

3. Closers: Thirty (30) years.

4. Exit devices: Three (3) years.

5. All other hardware: Two (2) years.

1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section.

B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, Key Owner Personnel, and Project Inspector.

C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Review City's keying standards. City to provide keying schedule.

PRODUCTS

1.10 MANUFACTURERS
Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes
Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley, McKinney
Locks, Latches Schlage Or Approved Equal
Cylinders Schlage Or Approved Equal
Exit Devices Von Duprin Or Approved Equal
Closers LCN Or Approved Equal
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-5
Push, Pulls Ives Trimco, BBW, D CI
Protection Plates Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson Or Approved Equal
Thresholds Zero Pemko, National Guard
Seals & Bottoms Zero Pemko, National Guard

1.11 MATERIALS
A. Hing
es: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins. Provide ball bearing hinges at all exterior doors and doors with closers.

1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:
a. Height:
1) Doors up to 42" wide: 4-1/2" inches.
2) Doors 42" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees. c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height.

2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels.

C. Continuous Hinges: As manufactured by Ives, an Allegion Company. UL rated as required.

D. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: Schlage "ND" Series as scheduled with "Sparta" design, fastened with through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs.

1. Provide cylindrical locksets exceeding the ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Grade 1 performance standards for strength, security, and durability in the categories below:
a. Abusive Locked Lever Torque Test minimum 3,100 inch-pounds without gaining access
b. Offset lever pull minimum 1,600 foot pounds without gaining access c. Vertical lever impact minimum 100 impacts without gaining access

2. Cycle life - tested to minimum 16 million cycles per ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Cycle Test with no visible lever sag or use of performance aids such as set screws or spacers

3. UL 10C for 4-0 x 10-0 3-hour fire door.

4. Cylinders: Refer to KEYING article, herein.

5. Provide solid steel anti-rotation through bolts and posts to control excessive rotation of lever.

6. Provide lockset that allows lock function to be changed to over twenty other common functions by swapping easily accessible parts.

7. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw capable of UL listing of 3 hours on a 4 x 10 opening. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.

8. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws.

9. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag.

10. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-6

11. Provide wired electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. a. 12 throug
h 24 volt DC operating capability, auto-detecting
b. Selectable EL (fail safe)/EU (fail secure) operating mode via switch on chassis c. 0.230A (230mA) maximum current draw
d. 0.010A (10mA) holding current
e. Modular / plug in request to exit switch

12. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides.

E. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled.

1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 2001 standards.

2. All internal parts shall be of cold-rolled steel with zinc dichromate coating.

3. Mechanism case shall have an average thickness of .140".

4. Compression spring engineering.

5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions.

6. All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners.

7. All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with ¾ throw and have a self-lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear.

8. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required.

9. All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent movement.

10. Lever Trim: Breakaway design, forged brass or bronze escutcheon with a minimum of .130 thickness, match lockset lever design.

11. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled without need for key.

12. Furnish glass bead kits for vision lites where required.

13. All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors.

14. Panic Hardware shall comply with CBC Section 11B.404.2.7 and shall be mounted between 34" and 44" above the finished floor surface.
a. Provide exit devices UL certified to meet maximum 5 pound requirements according to the California Building Code section 11B-309.4, and UL listed for Panic Exterior Fire Exit Hardware.

F. Closers: LCN or approved equal. Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc.

1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.

2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity and durability under all closer applications.

3. All parallel arm closers shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings. 1-9/16 steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold- open arms, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged steel main arms for strength, durability, and aesthetics for versatility of trim accommodation, high strength and long life.

4. All parallel arm closers so detailed shall provide advanced backcheck for doors subject to severe abuse or extreme wind conditions. This advanced backcheck shall be located to begin cushioning the opening swing of the door at approximately 45 degrees. The intensity of the backcheck shall be fully adjustable by tamper resistant non-critical screw valve.

5. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees.

6. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to - 30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door.

7. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-7

8. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied
at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position. Per 11B-404.2.8.1, door shall take at least 5 seconds to move from an open position of 90 degrees to a position of 12 degrees from the latch jamb.

G. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force design.

Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures.

1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled.

2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.

H. Door Stops:

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners.

Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.

2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (2016 CBC Section 11B-307).

3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

I. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges. Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware.

J. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.

1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope.

2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.

3. Use ¼ fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).

4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.5.

K. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors.

1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252.

Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements.

2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required.

3. Smoke & Dra
ft Control Doors, Provide UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 for use on S labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.

1.12 KEYING
A. Furnish a Proprietary Schlage masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect. Key system to be designated and combinated by the Schlage Master Key Department even if pinned by the Authorized Key Center, Authorized Security Center or a local authorized commercial dealer.

B. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation with a representative of Allegion or an Authorized Key Center or Authorized Security Center. Each Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-8
keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key group (in BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish
and location on the door.

C. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage Full Size Interchangeable Core (FSIC). Pack change keys independently (PKI)
D. Furnish construction keying for doors requiring locking during construction.

E. Furnish all keys with visual key control.

1. Stamp key Do Not Duplicate.

2. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on key.

F. Furnish all cylinders with visual key control. (Not all options listed below are available at the same time.)

1. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on face of cylinder plug (VKC).

G. Furnish mechanical keys as follows:

1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.

2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.

3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set.

4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set.

5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders.

6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.

1.13 FINISHES
A. Generally to be brushed chrome (626 on bronze/brass and 652 on steel) unless otherwise noted.

B. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.

C. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.

1.14 FASTENERS
A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.

B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.

C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish.

D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.

E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.

F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.

G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.

EXECUTION
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-9

1.15 INSPECTION
A. Verify
that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching device and that only the manufacturers furnished fasteners are used for installation and that it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives) 2016 Edition. A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of the swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector) with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subjected to the inspection.

The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the project and include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility.

1.16 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.

B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute.

Operating hardware will to be located between 34" and 44" AFF.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.

G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost.

H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware.

I. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.

J. All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected through the power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for in the Electrical Section.

K. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently marked with its function.

L. If a power supply is specified in the hardware sets, all conductors shall be terminated in the power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the power supply and the Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-10
electro-mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size conductors as specified in the manufacturers t
echnical documentation.

1.17 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.

E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.

Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.

1.18 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADAAG; and the drawings for access-compliant positioning requirements for the disabled.

1.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor is responsible for providing the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or a proprietary product technician to inspect installation and certify that hardware and its installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as specified herein.

1.20 SCHEDULE
A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications.

B. While the hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors, and other movable parts of the building, and establish type and standard of quality, the contractor is responsible for examining the Plans and Specifications and furnishing proper hardware for all openings whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in hardware groups in regard to regular doors they shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening for instruction; otherwise, list will be considered Complete. No extras will be allowed for omissions.

C. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-11
Abbreviation Name
ACC Accurate Lock & Hardware Co
GLY Glynn-Johnson Corp
IVE H.B. Ives
LCN LCN Commercial Division
PEM Pemko Mfg Co
SCH Schlage Lock Company
VON Von Duprin
ZER Zero International Inc
115929 OPT0381655 VERSION 1
GROUP NO. 0
1 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 628 IVE
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-PA-AX-35A-EO 626 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 SET SEAL SET WEATHERSTRIP BY

DOOR/FRAME

MANUFACTURER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
GROUP NO. 02
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY TWP CON 628 IVE
1 EA LEVER TRIM L9070L 17A LLL LLL LESS

LOCK CASE
626 SCH
1 EA MORTISE EU LOCK M8859E AE LXL 626 ACC
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 30-138 B250-253 ICX 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 SET SEAL SET WEATHERSTRIP BY

DOOR/FRAME

MANUFACTURER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL

CARD READER - WORK OF
DIVISION 28

LOCK CASE
626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 30-138 B250-253 ICX 626 SCH
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE
GROUP NO. 05
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
GROUP NO. 06
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD SPA 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 450S 630 GLY
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-13
GROUP NO. 07
2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE PA-AX-98-L-M996-17-FSE 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER

CARD READER - WORK OF
DIVISION 28

POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF
DIVISION 28
GROUP NO. 08
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE
1 EA LEVER TRIM L9070L 17A LLL LLL LESS

LOCK CASE
626 SCH
1 EA MORTISE EU LOCK M8859E AE LXL 626 ACC
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 30-138 B250-253 ICX 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CCV 626 IVE

CARD READER - WORK OF
DIVISION 28

POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF
DIVISION 28
GROUP NO. 10
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S SPA 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CCV 626 IVE
1 SET BULB SEAL BY AL FRAME

MANUFACTURER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 360AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 14/1A 3" AL PEM
GROUP NO. 11
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK W/

OUTSIDE INDICATOR
ND40S SPA OS-OCC 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CCV 626 IVE
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-15
GROUP NO. 12
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE
LOCK
ND50TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE
GROUP NO. 13
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE
LOCK
ND50TD SPA 14-028 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE
1 SET HEAD AND JAMB SEAL 870AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 360AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 14/1A 3" AL PEM
GROUP NO. 14
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY 628 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CDSI-PA-AX-3549A-L-DT-17-LBL 628 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CDSI-PA-AX-3549A-L-NL-360-
17-LBL
628 VON
3 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 ICX 626 SCH
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 XQ11-948 ICX 626 SCH
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SHCUSH 689 LCN
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-16
GROUP NO. 15
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY EPT 628 IVE
2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QELX-PA-AX-3549A-L-DT-
17-LBL
626 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QELX-PA-AX-3549A-L-NL-
360-17-LBL
626 VON
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 ICX 626 SCH
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SHCUSH 689 LCN

CARD READER - WORK OF
DIVISION 28

POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF
DIVISION 28
GROUP NO. 16
5 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE
1 EA AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB41T 630 IVE
1 EA EU STOREROOM LOCK ND80TDEU RHO RX CON
12V/24V DC
626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE
2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB 689 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 689 LCN

CARD READER - WORK OF
DIVISION 28

POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF
DIVISION 28
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-17
GROUP NO. 17
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31T 630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE
2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB 689 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 689 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA MEETING STILE 44STST OR BY HM DOOR MFR STST ZER
GROUP NO. 18
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD SPA 626 SCH
2 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 90H 630 GLY
2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
GROUP NO. 19
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD SPA 626 SCH
2 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE
2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
GROUP NO. 20

HARDWARE BY AUTO SLIDING

DOOR MFR
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100-18
GROUP NO. 21

HARDWARE BY ROLL UP

DOOR MFR
GROUP NO. 22
3 EA HINGE BB855A 5" X 6" 600 STA
1 EA PADLOCK L/CYL-FSIC KS43D3200 606 SCH
1 EA HASP 7" FLAT CRO
GROUP NO. 23
1 SET SELF CLOSING HINGE MAMMITH 180 LOX
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE PA-AX-98-L-NL-17-WH 630 VON
1 EA RIM CYLANDER 20-057 ICX 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass in the following locations:

1. Aluminum storefront.

2. Interior aluminum-framed doors and windows.

3. Exterior doors, including storefront doors and folding metal doors.

4. Interior borrowed lites and interior doors.

B. Glass of the following types:

1. Monolithic.

2. Insulated.

3. Frosted.

4. Mirror glass.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 43 49 Delegated Design.

B. Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

C. Section 08 1116 Interior Aluminum Door and Window Frames.

D. Section 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors.

E. Section 08 4113 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

C. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GLASS GLAZING 08 8100-2

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For ea
ch glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of exterior glass units required to be heat strengthened based on glass stress analysis calculations.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Glass: 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products,

2. Sealant: 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Calculations: Furnish calculations showing glass stresses based on glass lites and shading patterns. Calculations shall be prepared by the glass manufacturer and shall be signed by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of California.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.

1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Glazing Schedule: Indicate glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

Use same designation indicated on the Drawings.

D. Mirrors: Certification that mirrors meet requirements for safety glazing certifications council (SGCC).

E. Sample Warranties: Copy of special manufacturer's and Installers warranties stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.

B. Warranties: Executed special warranties specified in this Section.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that required for this Project, with a record of successful in- service performance.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GLASS GLAZING 08 8100-3
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual."

2. LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide."

3. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below:

1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C1036) type and class indicated.

2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C1048) condition indicated.

3. Laminated glass of each (ASTM C1172) kind indicated.

4. No visible strain pattern to the naked eye under various lighting conditions as judged solely by the Architect.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled, manufacturer-certified workers who custom fabricate glass similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

1. Label shall indicate manufacturers name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

2. Comply with CBC Chapter 24, section 2406.

F. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with appropriate Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) certification label.

G. Mockups: Before installing glazing, build mockups for each type of glass and finish required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects, quench pattern visibility both under natural viewing and polarized viewing conditions, and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
a. Use full size glass units to demonstrate fabrication techniques and quality.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting glass fabrication.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.

7. Rejection: If strain pattern or any other pattern that is not intended or approved is visible to the naked eye, as judged solely by the Architect, the glass will be rejected.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GLASS GLAZING 08 8100-4

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect
glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install liquid sealants only when ambient and substrate temperatures are above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.11 WARRANTIES
A. Insulating Glass: Furnish written warranty signed by glass manufacturer, agreeing to furnish replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects as defined.

1. Warranty Period: 10-years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Mirror Glass: Furnish written warranty agreeing to furnish replacement mirrors for those units developing silver spoilage.

1. Warranty Period: 15-years from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. These warranties shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Energy Performance Requirements: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor):

2. Fixed Glazing and Framing: Shall have U-factor of not more than 0.38 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

B. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GLASS GLAZING 08 8100-5

1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of
120-deg. F. and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180-deg. F.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.

2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.

3. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

4. Tempered Glass Coatings: Apply Low-E, frit, and other specified coatings to glass only after tempering to minimize quench pattern visibility.

D. Provide mirrored glass that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation.

2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), class and kind as indicated.

B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1503, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), 1/4-inch thick with smooth round safety edge, and Quality q2 (mirror), with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating, beveled edges, with minimum 91% visible light transmission. Attach to walls with mechanical cleat-type anchors to metal studs or solid backing and apply mirror adhesive.

1. ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied.

C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), class and kind as required.

D. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, fully tempered with horizontal tempering, Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; thickness as indicated.

1. Heat-strengthened float glass, and fully tempered float glass. a. All glazing inside the building to be tempered; with labeling. b. Thickness: 6.0 mm, UNO.
c. At the pool area utilize 9mm thickness at all doors and storefront. d. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.3 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E2190, Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace.

1. Product: Vitro Solarban 72 on Starphire glass; Oldcastle Architectural Glass, or Guardian Industries.
a. Visible Transmittance: 68 percent
b. Nighttime Winter U-value: 0.28
c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28.

2. Frit:

Applied to No. 3 surface where indicated on Drawings Surface location to be determined, color to be selected.

3. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.

4. Spacer: Thermally broken aluminum with black, color anodic finish or black powdered metal paint finish.

5. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

2.4 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. Compatibility: Select glazing compounds and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

B. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation.

C. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C920, Class A, and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected.

1. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 999.
b. GE Silicones; SCS1200.
c. Tremco; Proglaze.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Molded or extruded neoprene, EPDM, or silicone gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying with ASTM C864, D.S. Brown Co., Maloney, Tremco or equal.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GLASS GLAZING 08 8100-7
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, or
silicone of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying with ASTM C509, Type II, black; D.S. Brown Co., Maloney, Tremco or equal.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Glazing Stops: Screw applied or snap on type (beads) coordinated with glass section indicated, finished to complement exterior window finish.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Mirror Mastic: Adhesive setting compound manufactured specifically for setting mirrors on wall with support channel at bottom edge.

1. VOC Content: Not more than 70 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Stainless Steel Mirror Trim: Continuous stainless-steel J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch (9.5 and 22 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch (1.0 mm), fastened with stainless steel screws.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Pre-Glazed Units: Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to preglaze units at the factory, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Field-Glazed Units: Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.

2.9 MIRROR FABRICATION
A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.

1. Fabricate mirrors in single piece wherever possible.

2. Where mirror length exceeds practical shipping and installation limits, follow seam pattern indicated on Drawings.

3. Fabricate adjoining mirror units to be installed with hairline seams.

B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

1. Seal
edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system.

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. General: Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass exposed to the weather is required. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, and impact loading with no failure of any kind, including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gasketing to remain air and water tight, deterioration of glazing materials or other defects in the materials or their application.

B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

C. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GLASS GLAZING 08 8100-9
F. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

G. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

H. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

J. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

K. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

L. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of glazing in window units.

M. Do not allow sealants to come in contact with edges of laminated glass units.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

D. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.5 MIRROR INSTALLATION
A. Securely fasten chrome j-mold directly above backsplash of countertops. Clean j-mold and remove any construction debris before installing mirror glass.

B. Affix mirror glass to interior walls where indicated on Drawings using specified mastic.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GLASS GLAZING 08 8100-10
C. Apply a bead of clear silicone sealant to space between mirror glass and j-mold to create a seal against water penetra
tion from adjacent plumbing fixtures.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

B. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

D. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass using non-abrasive soft cloths as recommended by glass manufacturer.

E. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

F. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

3.7 GLAZING SCHEDULE
A. Type A: 1 Insulated Glazing Unit with Vitro Solarban 72 on Starphire glass; B. Type B: Not used.

C. Type C: Not used.

D. Type D: 1/4 Float Glass.

E. Type DL: 1/4 Laminated float glass with Frosted Finish.

F. Mirrors: 1/4 Float Glass, ASTM C1048 Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating. Applied to solid wall finish with mirror adhesive.

G. Suffix T=Tempered. Information to be shown on window elevations.

END OF SECTION 08 8100
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 CONCRETE FLOOR MOISTURE CONTENT AND PH TESTING 09 0512 - 1 SECTION 09 0512 CONCRETE FLOOR MOISTURE CONTENT AND PH TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete moisture content testing using relative humidity method.

2. Concrete pH testing.

3. Owner to engage an Independent laboratory firm to perform testing of all concrete slabs (on grade and elevated) in accordance with ASTM F2170, no sooner than 45 days prior to the installation of the finished flooring, scheduled to receive adhered floor coverings, such as carpet, resilient tile, resilient sheet goods, rubber tile, cork tile, ceramic tile and porcelain tile.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 0511 Concrete Floor Preparation.

B. Section 09 6423 Vapor Emission Treatment System.

C. Division 09 flooring sections specifying carpet, resilient flooring, and accessories requiring moisture and pH testing.

1.4 UNIT PRICE
A. If slab moisture vapor levels exceed specified maximums, a remedial sealer is required to be applied as directed by the Architect and will be included in the Contract Sum under a unit price per 1000 sq ft.

B. Unit Prices: Provide a unit price (cost per square foot) to provide the remedial vapor emission control system when testing reveals vapor emission levels are above acceptable limits and control system is required.

1. See Section 09 6423 for application requirements.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." B. Scheduling: Schedule work to permit concrete moisture testing to be completed minimum one week and maximum 3 weeks before floor coverings are installed.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Submit data indicating model, manufacturer, and calibration record for relative humidity measuring equipment.

2. Submit data for floor slab treatment products.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate test locations shown on building floor plan.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for concrete moisture acceptable limits.

B. Test Reports: Report test results in chart form.

1. Relative Humidity Test Method: Indicate test dates, time, depth of test well, in-situ temperature, relative humidity and pH levels.

2. Submit record of ambient air temperature, ambient relative humidity, and floor slab surface temperature when test sites are prepared, start of test, and end of test.

3. Indicate condition of building enclosure including position of operable windows and exterior doors when test sites are prepared, start of test, and end of test.

4. Submit transcript of data-logger.

5. Indicate operational status of HVAC systems maintaining environmental condition of spaces where tests are conducted when test sites are prepared, start of test, and end of test.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:

1. Do not perform concrete moisture testing until building is enclosed and HVAC system is operational.

2. Maintain building test areas at design operating conditions for minimum 48 hours before, during, and continuously after conducting testing.

3. When HVAC system is not operational at start of tests, maintain ambient conditions within test areas at 65 to 85 degrees F and 40 to 60 percent relative humidity for minimum 48 hours before, during, and continuously after conducting testing until building HVAC system is capable of maintaining design operating conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RELATIVE HUMIDITY TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Vaisala www.vaisala.com.

2. Wagner Moisture Meters, Rapid RH, www.wagnermeters.com.

3. Substitutions: As specified in Division 01.

B. Humidity and Temperature Probe and Meter: Comply with ASTM F2170.

2.2 PH TEST MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Micro Essential Laboratory www.microessentiallab.com.

2. Substitutions: As specified in Division 01.

B. pH Test Paper: Capable of indicating minimum 7.0 to 13 pH range.

C. pH Color Gage: Furnish pH test paper manufacturers visual color gage to identify measured pH.

D. Water: Distilled or de-ionized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING
A. If concrete slabs are designed and installed strictly as described in Division 03 of these guidelines, moisture should not be a problem for flooring. Nevertheless, an independent testing laboratory must perform moisture and pH tests that are required by the flooring manufacturer(s) to prove the suitability of a concrete slab to receive the finish Flooring. The County will retain the laboratory, unless otherwise determined by the CPM Division Manager.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

4. Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

5. Moisture and Alkalinity Testing:
a. Perform at a rate of three tests for the first 1,000 square feet and one additional test for each 1,000 square feet thereafter.
b. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869; proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. c. Internal Relative Humidity Test: ASTM F2170; proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75%RH or less. d. Digital Alkalinity-pH Test: ASTM F710; proceed with installation only after substrates have a result of 9.0pH or less.
e. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 CONCRETE FLOOR MOISTURE CONTENT AND PH TESTING 09 0512 - 4 C. Conduct a moisture test to verify concrete is sufficiently dry to receive Flooring installation.

A Moisture
Vapor Emission Rate (MVER) of less than 5 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours (2.5 kilograms per 100 square meters per 24 hours) is required, based on a 72 hour test period per ASTM F1869.

1. When MVER or RH results exceed those acceptable to the Flooring manufacturer, and when waiting for a slab to dry would delay completion of the building or work of improvement, the CPM Division Manager may order the use of a moisture mitigation system before flooring installation. The Owner shall specify a unit price bid item with an assumed quantity for the moisture mitigation system. If moisture and pH tests are found to be acceptable, a deductive change order can be issued to delete the moisture mitigation system from the construction contract.

2. The specified system shall include a 25 year warranty that no installation failure will occur due to a manufacturing defect with the system for a period of 25 years, nor will there be an installation failure of the subsequently installed underlayment, adhesive or floor covering due to moisture vapor emissions from the concrete substrate resulting from such defect for a period of 25 years from the date of installation.

D. Test Frequency: ASTM E1907.

1. Minimum of 10 and maximum of 30 tests to determine whether Flooring should be placed.

2. No fewer than 3 final tests shall be used on each concrete placement, however, regardless of how many total tests are required.

END OF SECTION 09 0512
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 1
SECTION 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).

2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).

3. Resilient channel installation for acoustical construction.

4. Flat strap and backing plate for support of wall mounted equipment and fixtures.

5. Mullion closures at junctures of wall perpendicular to exterior storefront system.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board: Application of gypsum board over non-load bearing steel framing.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Brand.

2. Stud sizes.

3. Stud gauge.

B. Shop Drawings: Show provision for fixture and equipment anchorage to stud systems different from typical systems or details indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide components that comply with rating requirements specified for fire-rated assemblies under UL 2079 for non-load bearing wall systems.

1. Deflection Clips and Firestop Track: Connections and/or top runner provided in fire- resistance-rated assemblies shall be certified by UL 2079 for cyclic movement requirements.

C. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 2
D. Structural supports and blocking for light fixtures and miscellaneous wall- or ceiling-mounted items
shall be designed and engineered by Contractor.

E. Performance Requirements:

1. Loads: Comply with CBC requirements for design of metal framing systems for gypsum board wall assemblies.

2. Deflection:
a. Partitions to Receive Gypsum Board: L/240 at 5 psf.
b. Partitions to Receive Tile Backer Board: L/360 at 10 psf. c. Framed Ceilings: L/360. L/240 maximum, typical.

3. Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Framing and Furring Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

2. Scafco.

B. Steel Slip-Type Head Joints: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Brady Construction Innovations, Inc., Sliptrack Systems.

2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, SLP-TRK Slotted Track.

C. Grid Suspension Assemblies: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Chicago Metallic Corp.

2. USG Interiors, Inc.

D. Steel Headers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, ProX Header.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Studs and Runners: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal and profiles shown on Drawings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.040-inch (1.02-mm) (20 gauge). a. If stud thickness is not indicated, provide thickness as required for specified deflection criteria, based on stud depth and spacing indicated and partition height required.
b. If stud spacing is not indicated, space studs at 16-inches oc.

3. Flange Edges of Studs: Bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the requirements indicated on Drawings for depth indicated.

4. Protective Coating: ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180) minimum, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Slotted
Slip Track: ASTM C645 top runner with 2-1/2-inch- (63.5-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs; with 1-1/2-inch x 1/4-inch vertical slots.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated and where required by Owner for Owner-installed items. Where backing is not indicated on Drawings comply with the following:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

2. Install continuous plate across minimum 3 studs, attaching to each stud.

3. Notch channel at studs.

4. For Loads Under 50 lbs/ft:
a. Plate Size: 6" x 1-1/4", 16 gage track channel.
b. Attachment: No. 8 flat head screws, three at each stud.

5. For Loads 51 lbs/ft to 100 lbs/ft:
a. Plate Size: 6" x 1-1/4", 16 gage track channel.
b. Attachment: Welding.

6. For Loads 101 lbs/ft to 250 lbs/ft:
a. Plate Size: 6-inch wide 14 gage plate with 4" x 1-1/4" 16 gage track channel stiffeners welded to back.

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) minimum, unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73- mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

2. Finish: Galvanized, G90 at exterior locations, G60 at interior locations.

3. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

F. Resilient Furring Channels and Clips: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Manufacturer: Unimast, RC-2 Pro, Cemco RC-2 or Dale/Incor RFC-2.

2. Configuration: Hat shaped.

3. Isolation Clips: Kinetics IsoMax.

G. Mullion Closures: Gordon, Inc.; Mullion Mate Series 40 Extruded Aluminum Partition Gap Closures.

1. Provide pre-assembled and spring-loaded closure units to provide a tight fit for vertical junctures of partitions and window walls.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 4
times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M by an independent testing a
gency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12- mm) diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of

0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2 inches (51 mm).

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): As specified herein.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Shot Pins: 0.140-inch diameter low velocity powder-actuated drive pins equivalent to Ramset/Red Head No. 1508, or equal, with 7/8-inch minimum penetration into concrete.

C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

D. Acoustical Gasket at Window System/Framing Interface: ASTM D1065, Type 1, Class A; flexible cellular neoprene gasket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPA
RATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire- resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754.

1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C1063 that apply to framing installation.

2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Cutting:

1. General: Cut framing components squarely or on angle as required to fit tightly with proper bearing against abutting members.

2. Cutting Studs: If stud web is cut more than 50-percent, or stud flanges are cut, restore stud to original strength by wire-tying, or welding on steel reinforcement.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

1. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.

D. Backing Plates:

1. Install as indicated and specified for support of wall-hung cabinets, toilet partitions and accessories, and other items to be mounted on vertical surfaces.

2. Welding shall comply with AWS D1.3.

3. Paint welds with a rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

F. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 6
G. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading im
posed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

H. Partitions must securely abut to building mullions and walls. Do not use mechanical fasteners to connect framing to mullions; provide closed cell neoprene gasket between mullion and end stud.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

1. Maximum Spacing: On center spacing in conformance with CBC and DSA requirements.

F. Grid Suspension Systems for Use with Gypsum Board: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 7
B. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the
referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading requirements specified:

1. Space studs as indicated on Drawings.

2. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction and so that leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Deflection Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Frame door openings to comply with details indicated and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure, where indicated on Drawings.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

D. Shot Pins: 0.140-inch diameter low velocity powder-actuated drive pins equivalent to Ramset/Red Head No. 1508, or equal, with 7/8-inch minimum penetration into concrete.

E. Stud Wall Lateral Bracing: Comply with requirements of the CBC. Laterally brace walls extending above ceiling height by means of braces installed at not more than 45 degrees from horizontal as follows:

1. 3-5/8 in x 20-gauge studs at 8 feet oc on each side of wall (in tension only).

2. 12-gauge wire at 6 feet oc on each side of wall (in tension only).

3. 3-5/8-inch x 1-1/4-inch x 16-gauge studs at 8 feet oc acting in either tension or compression. They may be on one side of wall only.
a. Maximum length is 7 feet when in compression.
b. For lengths from 7 to 10 feet (when in compression) form box studs built from two studs welded toe to toe for lengths from 10 to 16 (when in compression). c. Form T sections of 4 x 1-5/8 x 18-gauge studs welded together.

4. Attach stud braces at middle third of beams, purlins or joists.

F. Provide horizontal 3/4-inch channel track and web stiffeners continuous at all walls over 17 feet high.

G. Install noncombustible void closures in metal decking flutes where walls abut decking.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 8
H. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch
(3 mm) in 10 feet in any direction from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

I. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet in any direction from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.6 RESILIENT CHANNEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Attaching Channels:

1. Attach USG RC-1 resilient channels at 24-inch center-to-center spacing perpendicular to the framing. Use 16-inch spacing for fire-rated assemblies.

2. Use USG 1-inch type S Bugle Head drywall screws.

3. Attach channels with mounting flanges facing in only one direction. For walls, the gypsum board mounting flange should face upward and pre-punched holes downward.

4. Hold back ends of channels 1-inch from intersecting surfaces.

5. Splice channels only at studs and overlap butt ends. Screw-attach through both flanges.

6. Locate channels a maximum of 3-inches from framing at base and head of wall.

C. Isolate top and bottom runners from direct contact with structure by installing over either:

1. Continuous compression or isolation strips as specified, or

2. Two continuous 1/4-inch beads of acoustical sealant specified in Section 07 92 19 applied at quarter points of track width.

D. Studs at terminal ends of partitions abutting intersecting walls or partitions, and studs that would otherwise contact intermediate structural columns shall be similarly installed over strips or sealant.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 09 2216
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-1
SECTION 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gypsum wallboard, rated and non-rated.

B. Gypsum board trims and accessories.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 8400 Firestopping.

B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Acoustical sealant.

C. Section 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of gypsum board certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing agency.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-2

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver
materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.

C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.

C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials.

Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide gypsum board materials manufactured by one of the following:

1. Georgia Pacific.

2. Pabco.

3. United States Gypsum Co.

B. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396/C1396M except where noted otherwise:

1. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M; Type X . Throughout unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M; High-strength, sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.

3. Long Edges: Tapered.

4. Thickness: ASTM C840, 5/8-inch throughout unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

5. Finish Levels: Level 4 throughout unless indicated as Level 5 on Drawings Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-3
D. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177/C1177M, Georgia-Pacific, Dens-Glass Gold Exterior
Sheathing, 5/8-inch- (15.8-mm-) thick water-resistant treated gypsum core board with inorganic glass mats both sides and long edges, gold color alkali resistant surface coating, for exterior applications.

2.2 CERAMIC TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C1178/C1178M.

1. Manufacturer: Georgia Pacific; DensShield Tile Backer.

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10.

4. Locations: At Toilet wet walls; maximum framing at 16-inches oc.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C1047.

1. Material: Formed metal or metal combined with paper, with metal sheet steel zinc- coated by hot-dip or electrolytic processes, or with aluminum or rolled zinc.

B. Square Corner Bead Reinforcement: One of the following or accepted equivalent:

1. Dur-A-Bead as manufactured by USG or accepted equivalent.

2. Wallboard corner bead with 1 1/4-inch flanges as manufactured Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. or accepted equivalent.

C. Metal Casing Bead: One of the following or accepted equivalent:

1. No. 200A Metal Trim manufactured by USG or accepted equivalent.

2. No. 100 wall board casing manufactured by Gold Bond National Gypsum Company.

D. Control Joints: One of the following or accepted equivalent:

1. No. 093; as manufactured by USG or accepted equivalent.

2. E-Z expansion joint 0.093 zinc control joint, manufactured by Gold Bond National Gypsum Company.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.

B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: ASTM C475 and as follows:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, one grade for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board:

1. Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-4

2. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and fi
lling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.

D. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose.

E. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.

F. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Interior Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.

1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.

2. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames.

B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel framing.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
a. Gold Bond, Type-S, 1-inch drywall screws.
b. U.S. Gypsum Type-S, panhead, 1-inch.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Other Fasteners: As required and recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer and in accordance with the specified Standards. Space fasteners in accordance with CBC Table 47 G and 47 H.

E. Acoustical Accessories:

1. Acoustic Insulation: See Section 07 2100.

2. Acoustical Sealant: See Section 07 9200.

3. Rated Acoustical Sealant: See Section 07 9200.

3.1 EXAM

INATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

B. When cutting gypsum drywall is required, work from the face side. When cutting by scoring, cut through the face paper and then snap the panel back away from the cut face. Then break the back paper by snapping the gypsum board in the reverse direction or by cutting the back paper.

1. Smooth all cut ends and edges of panels where necessary to obtain a smooth joint.

C. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered.

D. Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, install according to ASTM C840 in specific locations as directed by Architect.

E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels.

Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

F. Locate both edge or end joints over supports. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible.

G. Attach gypsum panels to studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to nailing members except where joints are at right angles to framing members.

H. For cut-outs in panels for pipes, fixtures, or other small openings, make holes and cut-outs by sawing or by such other method that will not fracture the core or tear the covering and with such accuracy that plates, escutcheons, trim, etc., will cover all edges.

1. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

2. Use of score and knock out method will not be permitted.

I. Where partitions intersect open roof trusses and other structural members projecting below underside of roof structure, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to-1/2-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-6
J. Apply wall board first to ceilings and then to walls, using maximum practical lengths to minimize end j
oints.

K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4-inch-to-1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.

M. Where gypsum wallboard is applied to metal ceiling framing or furring, attach with 1 inch Type S screws at 16 inches oc in field and with 1-1/4 inch Type S screw at 12 inches oc at edges.

N. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.

O. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces.

1. Provide where system abuts structural elements.

2. Provide at dissimilar materials.

3. Provide where lengths in partitions exceed 30'-0".

P. At recesses for equipment and accessories in fire rated walls, line recess with fire rated gypsum board to maintain specified fire rating of wall.

Q. For partitions, apply full height sheets with long dimension parallel to framing members with abutting edges over supports. Where ceiling heights exceed 10'-0" and where required by fire resistive ratings, apply sheets with long dimension perpendicular to framing members. For ceilings, apply sheets with long dimension either perpendicular or parallel to framing members to result in fewest joints. For fire-rated assemblies, apply gypsum board in accordance with CBC Tables 720.1(2) and 720.1(3) as applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FASTENERS
A. Start screws at the center of the gypsum board sheet.

B. Do not locate fasteners less than 3/8-inch from edges or ends of sheets. Do not locate fasteners less than one-inch from edges or ends in horizontal applications.

C. Fire-Rated Partitions: Install fasteners in accordance with the more restrictive of either CBC Table 720.1(2) or the Underwriters Laboratories assemblies as denoted on partition schedule.

D. Non-Fire-Rated Partitions: Install fasteners in accordance with GA-216 and ASTM C840.

E. Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install fasteners in accordance with CBC Table 720.1(3).

F. Non-Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install fasteners spaced not more than 12-inches on center.

G. Install screws using powered screw guns with adjustable screw-depth control head. Drive shank perpendicular to gypsum board surface. Do not hammer screws.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-7
H. Set fastener heads slightly below surface of gypsum board, but do not break or strip paper face around fastener.

Stagger fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges.

J. Omit fasteners at edges where metal edge trim will be installed.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed.

Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated.

D. Control Joints:

1. Ceilings: Maximum area for ceilings with perimeter relief shall be 2,500-sq. ft.; maximum area for ceilings without perimeter relief shall be 900-sq. ft. Do not exceed 50-feet between control joints in ceilings with perimeter relief; 30-feet between control joints in ceilings without perimeter relief.

2. Walls and Partitions: Maximum spacing between control joints shall not exceed 30- feet.

3. Control joint locations shall occur only where indicated on reviewed layout drawings.

E. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated.

B. Carefully inspect the Drawings and verify the desired location of metal trim. Install all metal trim in strict accordance with the approved submittal of the manufacturers recommendations, paying particular attention to make all trim installations plumb, level and true to line with firm attachment to supporting members.

C. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.

D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to trim accessories with concealed face flanges as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer and as required to prevent cracks from developing in joint compound at flange edges.

1. Taping is not required under wainscot surfaces, except at moisture-resistant type and fire-rated type walls.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-8
E. Fold reinforcing tape along its centerline and apply to all interior angles, following the same procedure for all joints.

Lightly sand and dry compound with fine sandpaper between coats to remove all irregularities.

G. Apply a second coat of compound to all joints, feathering approximately 3 inches beyond edges of the tape. Also apply a second coat to all nail recesses, leaving flush with the adjacent surface. When compound is dry, sand again.

H. Apply final skim coat, feathering out approximately 2 inches beyond the second coat. Third coat nail recesses and metal trims. Skim coat interior angles. After drying, lightly sandpaper surfaces, using caution not to excessively damage the face paper of the gypsum drywall.

I. Examine surfaces to ensure against defects. Touch up as required for uniformity. Provide smooth, un-textured sanded finish suitable to receive specified paint system.

J. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C840:

1. Level 0: In areas of temporary construction, no taping or accessories are required.

2. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas. Provide higher level of finish as required to comply with fire-resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.

3. Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at tile, except remove tool marks and ridges.

4. Level 3: Gypsum board surfaces, where textured finishes will be used.

5. Level 4: Gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level is specified.

6. Level 5: Gypsum board surfaces at areas visible to tenants and the public.

K. Interior Gypsum Board Finishing:

1. Corners: Square.

2. Taping (Level 1):
a. Use taping or all-purpose compound.
b. Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints. c. Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound. d. Remove excess compound. Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.

3. First Coat (Level 2):
a. Use taping or all-purpose drying-type compound or setting-type joint compound.
b. Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound over body of tape and allow to dry completely in accordance with manufacturers instructions. c. Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.

4. Second Coat (Level 3):
a. Use all purpose or topping drying type joint compound. b. After first coat treatments is dried, apply second coat of compound over tape and trim, feathering compound 2-inches beyond edge of first coat.

5. Third Coat (Level 4):
a. Use all purpose or topping drying type joint compound. b. After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat to joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2-inches beyond edge of second coat.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-9
c. Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand, to provide surface
free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, ready for application of finish.
d. Finish Texture: Smooth.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9-mm) setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements.

2. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) setback where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly.

D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up.

Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud flanges, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oc. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.

G. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oc and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Take all means necessary to prevent spilling and splashing compound. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900-10
B. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap and debris resulting from the gypsum drywall installation and fi
nishing operations.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09 2900
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-1
SECTION 09 3000 TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Porcelain tile flooring
B. Ceramic tile wall finish.

C. Epoxy grout at Restrooms.

D. Metal edge transition strips.

E. Solid surface or marble thresholds

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers: Sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

B. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum backing board and cementitious backing board installed as part of gypsum wallboard systems for use under tile installations.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

B. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Grout of each type and for each color required.

3. Metal edge transition strip.

4. Threshold material.

C. CALGreen Submittals: Provide product data for the following:

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Finish Material Pollutant Control; Adhesives, Sealants, and Caulks: For adhesives, sealants, and caulks, including printed statement of VOC content.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-2

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type
, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's Qualifications: A minimum of 3-years experience installing ceramic tile of the types specified, and a minimum of 5 installations of a magnitude similar to or larger than the work of this Section.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance without delaying progress of the work.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Floor tile shall have a minimum dry coefficient of friction (DCOF) of 0.42 determined in accordance with ANSI A137.1 DCOF AcuTest.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.

B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup.

C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Floor tile shall have a minimum dry coefficient of friction (DCOF) of 0.42 determined in accordance with ANSI A137.1 DCOF AcuTest.

B. Floor Surface Profile, ASTM E1155:

1. Floor Flatness Number (FF): 50 (1/8 in 10-0).

2. Floor Levelness Number (FL): 35.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-3
C. Confirm flatness requirements within 72 hours of finishing the slab.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A.

ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated.

B. Porcelain Floor Tile (CT-2): ASTM C1028, and the following:

1. Coefficient of Friction, Dry (DCOF): 0.42 or greater per ANSI A137.1.

2. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Daltile.

3. Product: Society

4. Size: 12 x 24.

5. Color: Union Smoke.

C. Ceramic Wall Tile (CT-1): Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:

1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Fire Clay.

2. Product: Natural Press

3. Size: 2 x 8.

4. Colors:
a. Base: Tin Oxide Gloss Satin.
b. Accent: Indigo Satin, Ultramarine Gloss, Ultramarine Satin, XXXX.

D. Trim: Schluter strips, stainless steel

1. Manufacturers: Daltile.

2. Tile Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Nominal Thickness: 6mm.

4. Face: As selected by Architect.

5. Finish: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Shapes and Trim: Selected from manufacturer's standard shapes and trim units:

1. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements:
a. Size: As indicated on Drawings, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.
b. Base: Coved.
1) Color: Match floor tile.
2) Size: 6 x 12.
3) Outside Corner: 1 x 6.
c. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap.
1) Color: Match wall tile.
d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.04 and ANSI A118.15. Provide Type S mortar that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of minimum 1/2-inch to maximum of 1-1/4-inches.

1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-4
B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.

1. Provide
product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F (60 and 100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

C. Water: Clean, potable.

2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, Portland cement, latex additive, and water; latex- Portland cement type; un-sanded.

1. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows:

2. Latex Type: Manufacturers standard.

3. Color: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Color Admixture: Cementitious type, color as specified from manufacturers full color range including premium colors.

C. Application: Use commercial Portland cement grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in floor tile unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Foot Traffic Floor Transitions:

1. Description: Metal profiles designed to provide a smooth transition between tile coverings and flooring or finished concrete at lower elevations.

2. Product: Provide "Schluter-RENO-U" manufactured by Schluter Systems, or equal, stainless steel.

B. Edge Strips:

1. Description: L-shaped profile with 1/8-inch-wide visible surface and integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg and grout joint spacer.

2. Product: Provide "Schluter-SCHIENE" or "Schluter-JOLLY" manufactured by Schluter Systems, or equal, stainless steel.

C. Outside Corner Edge Protection:

1. Description: Stainless steel edging profile for 90- or 135-degree outside corners of tiled walls.

2. Product: Provide "Schluter-ECK-E" manufactured by Schluter Systems, or equal, stainless steel.

D. Thresholds: Solid surfacing material fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-5

2. ASTM C503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241 and with honed finis
h; color to coordinate with floor tile.
a. Size: 1/2 inch high by width of jamb by full width of wall or frame opening. b. Edges: Beveled one side as indicated on Drawings, radiused edges from bevel to vertical face.

3. Finish: As selected by Architect.

E. Ceramic Tile Backing Panels: See Section 09 2900.

F. Metal Edge Strips: Schluter Systems, or approved equal.

G. Protective Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's heavy-duty product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout as manufactured by Custom Building Products, Bostik, Hydrament, Laticrete, or Mapei.

2.6 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

2.7 UNDERLAYMENT FOR TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Provide where concrete floor substrate does not meeting specified flatness criteria.

1. Basis-of-Design: Mapei, Ultraplan Easy, or accepted equivalent that is compatible with tile setting mortar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

B. Level and smooth subfloor, incorporating slopes as required on Drawings. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions.

C. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.

D. Do not start work until grounds, anchors, recessed frames, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work in or behind tile have been installed. Do not proceed until adjoining work is protected.

E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-6

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Blending:

For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCNA installation methods indicated.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.

E. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.

H. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

B. Remove latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

C. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-7
E. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Mana
gement and Disposal.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensure that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

D. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.

3.6 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. General: Install tile according to most current edition of the TCNA Handbook using method numbers as indicated below.

B. Floor Tile over Concrete Floor: TCNA Handbook, No. F113.

C. Floor Tile over Cementitious Self-Leveling Underlayment: TCNA Handbook, No. F185.

D. Floor Tile Thin-set over Concrete Slab with Epoxy Grout: TCNA Handbook, No. F115.

E. Wall Tile over Metal Studs and Gypsum Wallboard: TCNA Handbook, No. W243.

F. Thresholds: TCNA Handbook, No. TR611.

G. Expansion Joints: TCNA Handbook, No. EJ171.

1. Exterior: Provide expansion joints at 12- to 16-feet on center in both directions, over cold joints and saw-cut control joints, and where tile abuts restraining surfaces. Joint width shall be minimum 3/8-inch wide for joints spaced 12-feet on center and 1/2-inch wide for joints spaced 16-feet on center.

2. Interior: Provide expansion joints at 24- to 36-feet on center in both directions, over cold joints and saw-cut control joints, and where tile abuts restraining surfaces. Joint spacing for tile exposed to direct sunlight or moisture shall be 12-to 16-feet on center.

Joint width for paver tile shall be minimum 1/4-inch wide; ceramic mosaic tile and glazed wall tile shall be minimum 1/8-inch.

3. Sealant Materials: As specified in Section 07 9200.

END OF SECTION 09 3000
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILING 09 3000-8
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B Septembe
r 24, 2024
SECTION 09 50 00
Acoustical Ceilings
Lyra Plant Based (PB) Direct-Apply
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes

1. Acoustical ceiling panels

2. Fasteners
B. Related Sections

1. Section 09 51 53 Direct-Applied Acoustical Ceilings

2. Section 01 81 13 - Sustainable Design Requirements

3. Section 01 81 19 - Indoor Air Quality Requirements

4. Section 02 42 00 - Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials

5. Divisions 23 - HVAC Air Distribution

6. Division 26 - Electrical
C. Alternates

1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products that have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation.

2. Submittals that do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Underwriters' Laboratories Classified Acoustical performance; Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024

1.3 REFERENCES
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1)ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method
2)ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
3)ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 4)ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems 5)ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum
6)ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products International Building Code
ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
ASCE 7 American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
California Department of Public Health CDPH/EHLB Emission Standard Method Version 1.2 2017 LEED - Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design is a set of rating systems for the design, construction, operation, and maintenance of green buildings International Well Building Standard
Mindful Materials
Living Building Challenge
U.S. Department of Agriculture BioPreferred program (USDA BioPreffered).

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Exposed Structure

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings show locations of items that are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.

D. Acoustical Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.
a. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.

1.6 SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS
Transparency: Manufacturers will be given preference when they provide documentation to support sustainable requirements for the following: Material ingredient transparency, Removal of Red List Ingredients per LBCV3, Life Cycle impact information, Low-Emitting Materials, and Clean Air performance.

1. Health Product Declaration. The end use product has a published, complete Health Product Declaration with disclosure at a minimum of 1000ppm of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard.

2. Declare Label. The end use product has a published Declare label by the International Living Future Institute with disclosure of 100 ppm with a designation of Red List Free or Compliant (less than 1% proprietary ingredients).

3. Low Emitting products with VOC emissions data. Preference will also be given to manufacturers that can provide emissions data showing their products meet CDHP Standard Method v1.1 (Section 01350).

4. Life cycle analysis. Products that have communicated lifecycle data through Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) will be preferred.

5. End of Life Programs/Recycling: Where applicable, manufacturers that provide the option for recycling of their products into new products at end-of-life through take-back programs will be preferred.

6. Products meeting LEED V4 requirements including:

Storage & Collection of Recyclables
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024 Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning
Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction
Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Environmental Product Declarations Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Sourcing of Raw Materials Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Material Ingredients Construction and Demolition Waste Management

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.

1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification.

B. Acoustical Panels: As with other architectural features located at the ceiling, may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern through possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are present.

C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Conditions: Ensure site condition relative humidity is less than 70%. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris. The area of installation, adhesive, and panels should be conditioned at 65°F or above for 48 hours prior, during, and 48 hours after the installation is complete.

B.: Lyra PB panels attached to the deck with adhesives must be installed where the building is enclosed and the HVAC system is functioning and in continuous operations for the life of the product. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc.) must be complete and dry. These products are not recommended for exterior applications where standing water is present, or where moisture will come into direct contact with the ceiling.

1.10 ALTERNATE CONSTRUCTION WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Ceiling material being reclaimed must be kept dry and free from debris.

B. Contact the Armstrong Recycle Center a consultant will verify the condition of the material and that it meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling. The Armstrong consultant with provide assistance to facilitate the recycling of the ceiling.

C. Recycling may qualify for LEED Credits:
a. LEED 2009 - Category 4: Material and Resources (MR)
i. Credit MRc2: Construction Waste Management
b. LEEDv4 - MRp2 - Construction Waste Management Planning Qualifies as a material stream (non-structural) targeted for diversion. Ceilings will be source-separated and diverted through the Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Program.
c. LEEDv4-MRc5 -
i. Option 1: Divert ceilings to qualify for one of the 3 material streams (50%) ii. Option 2: Divert ceilings to qualify for one of the 4 material streams (75%)

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping
B. Warranty Period:

1. Acoustical panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion C. the Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024

1.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ceiling:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Lyra PB Direct-Apply Panel

2.2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS

1. Surface Texture: Smooth

2. Composition: Fiberglass Plant Based

3. Color: White(WH)

4.Size(inches): 24 x 48 x 1 item 8401PB(_ _), 48 x 48 x 1 item 8404PB(_ _), see data page for custom sizes

5. Edge Profile: Square Edge

6. Noise Reduction Coefficient( NRC): 0.80 installed with A mounting (direct to hard surface)

7. Articulation Class (AC): ASTM E 1111; Classified with UL label on product carton 190

8. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL)

9. Light Reflectance (LR) White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.88

10. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus

11. Recycle Content: Up to 71% recycled content. (Pre-consumer, post-consumer and post industrial)

12. Material Ingredient Transparency: Health Product Declaration (HPD); Declare Label

13. Life Cycle Assessment: Third Party Certified Environment Product Declaration (EPD)

14. Acceptable Product: Armstrong LYRA Plant Based (PB) Direct-Apply as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries
B. Accessories

1. Recommended Adhesive (by other) Titebond ® GREENchoice Acoustical Ceiling Tile Adhesive PART 3 - EXECUTION
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum B September 24, 2024

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings)

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Area Preparation: Surfaces must be dry and free of dust, grease, oil, dirt or any other material that may deter adhesion. If the paint is flaking or peeling it must be removed. Existing finish paint must be well-bonded and not flaking or peeling.

B. Painted Surfaces: Avoid applying to a newly painted ceiling. Glossy painted surfaces must be abraded. For painted or sealed surfaces, install a small test area and observe after 12 hours. For plaster ceilings, plaster must be painted, non-chipping, and smooth.

C. Surface Flatness: To ensure a finished installation that is level, it is recommended that the ceiling surface for attachment be free of irregularities and be level within 1/4" in 12' D. Panel Layout: Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.

E. Coordination: Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer installation instructions.

B. Replace damaged and broken panels.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove any ceiling products that cannot be successfully cleaned and or repaired. Replace with attic stock or new product to eliminate evidence of damage.

END
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-1
SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings of the following types:

1. Standard ceiling tile system.

2. Scrubbable ceiling tile system.

B. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board: Suspended gypsum board ceilings.

B. Section 09 5437 - Wood Grille Ceilings
C. Division 21: Sprinkler heads in acoustical ceilings.

D. Division 23: Grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings.

E. Division 26: Lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including the following:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

4. Ceiling suspension members.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Minimum Drawings Size: 1/4 = 1-0.

2. Ceiling suspension system members.

3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including, but not limited to, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

5. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceiling or is supported by them.

6. Coordinate ceiling with above-ceiling works to ensure routing of piping, ductwork, etc. will not create conflicts with mounting of ceiling or any ceiling-mounted item.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-2
C. Shop Drawings: Submit reflected ceiling plans on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other for the fabrication and installation of the Work, based on input from installers of the items involved for Architect's action.

1. Layout of suspension systems, location of hangers, seismic braces and trapezes.

2. Hanger spacing and fastening details.

3. Trapeze details.

4. Splicing method for main and cross runners.

5. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

6. Support at ceiling fixtures and air diffusers.

7. Change in level details.

8. Locations and dimensions of access panels, light fixtures, supply and exhaust grilles and diffusers, sprinkler heads, speakers, and detection devices.

9. Seismic control details.

10. Develop and coordinate location of all Work which is to be located in ceiling with the Sections involved per Section 013300 prior to making shop drawing submittal.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit samples of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work.

1. Furnish sufficient samples to establish full range of colors and textures for materials exposed in the finished Work. Label samples to indicate product and location in the Work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Ceiling Tiles: Samples of each acoustical tile type, pattern, and color; 12 x 24 minimum.

3. Set of 12-inch-long samples of suspension system members, moldings, and trim; one of each profile and color.

E. CALGreen Submittals: Provide product data for the following:

1. For CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Finish Material Pollutant Control; Adhesives, Sealants, and Caulks: For adhesives, sealants, and caulks, including printed statement of VOC content.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical tile ceiling.

B. Calculations: Submit for Architect's information. Submit calculations prepared by a qualified Structural Engineer, registered in State of California, for details other than as shown or specified.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling and components and anchor and fastener type.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver
extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.

1. Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E48. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E580/E580M.

2. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-4

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver
acoustical panels, linear metal pans, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges, bending or denting units, or damaging units in any way.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Provide linear metal ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:

1. 2019 CBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay- in Panel Ceilings."
B. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

C. VOC Content: Sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified in Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements.

1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturers standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4-inches away from test surface per ASTM E795.

E. Acoustical Panel Color and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E1264 and not manufacturers proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturers full Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-5
range that comply with requirement indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performanc
e, edged detail, and size.

2.2 CEILING TILES
A. Basis-of-Design Ceiling Tile (ACT-1): Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Optima Tegular.

1. Item Number: 3257PB and 3282.

2. Classification: Type XII, Form 2, Pattern E

3. Size: 24 by 48-inches and 24 by 96-inches.

4. Thickness: 1-inch.

5. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber.

6. Acoustics NRC: 0.95.

7. CAC: NA.

8. Edge: Square tegular.

9. Surface Color: White.

10. Surface Finish: Factory-applied latex paint.

11. Exposed Grid Surface: 9/16-inch with 1/8-inch bolt slot; 3257PB.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Suspension System: ASTM C635/C635M, Armstrong World Industries, Inc.,

1. Standard Grid:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Silhouette XL Exposed Tee. b. Finish: White, low gloss baked enamel finish, color to match ceiling tiles exactly.
c. Main Runners: 15/16-inch flange, 1-11/16-inch high, double web construction. d. Cross Runners: 15/16-inch flange, double web construction. e. Wall Angle, Reveals, and Miscellaneous Trim: Roll-formed from electro- galvanized steel strip to profiles indicated.

2. Large Format Grid:
a. Basis-of-Design: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Interlude XL Dimensional Tee.
b. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16-inch.
c. Finish: White, low gloss baked enamel finish, color to match ceiling tiles exactly.

3. Seismic Category: CDE.

4. Finish: White, low gloss baked enamel finish, color to match ceiling tiles exactly.

5. Wall Angle, Reveals, and Miscellaneous Trim: Roll-formed from electro-galvanized steel strip to match main runners and cross tees.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, Direct Hung, double web, Intermediate-Duty System, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, Direct-Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter (12-gage).

D. Support Hangers and Channels: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust-inhibitive paint, size and shape to suit application and seismic requirements.

1. Hanger Wires: Connection device capable of carrying not less than 100-pounds.

2. Bracing Wires: Connection device capable of carrying not less than 200-pounds or the actual design load, whic
hever is greater, with a safety factor of 2 without yielding.

E. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

G. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical tiles in-place.

2.4 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-7
C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half-width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with seismic design requirements indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C636/C636M.

C. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans.

3.4 INSTALLATION, SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system.

B. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.

C. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

D. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of four tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-8
E. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to c
ast-in-place hanger inserts, post-installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power- actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

F. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

G. Space hangers not more than 48-inches oc along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8-inches from ends of each member.

H. Ceiling grid members shall be attached to not more than 2 adjacent walls in accordance with ASCE 7, Section 13.5.6.2(b). Ceiling grid members shall be at least 3/8-inch and not more than 3/4-inch free of other walls. If walls run diagonally to ceiling grid system runners, one end of main and cross runners shall be free, and a minimum of 3/4-inch clear of wall.

I. The width of the perimeter supporting closure angle shall be not less than 7/8-inch.

J. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, kinked or otherwise damaged runners.

K. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors.

L. Provide expansion joints in the ceiling at intersections of corridors and at junctions of corridors with lobbies or other areas.

M. Provide lateral-force bracing assemblies consisting of a compression strut and four 12-gauge splayed bracing wires oriented 90-degrees from each other at the following spaces:

1. Place sets of bracing wires spaced not more than 12-feet by 12-feet on center.

2. Provide bracing wires at locations not more than 1/2 the specified spacing from each perimeter wall and at the edge of vertical ceiling offsets.

3. The slope of these wires shall not exceed 45-degrees from the plane of the ceiling and shall be taut without causing the ceiling to lift. Splices in bracing wires are not permitted.

4. Compression struts shall not be more than 1 (horizontal) in 6 (vertical) out of plumb.

N. Provide seismic separation joints for ceiling areas greater than 2,500-square feet.

O. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) oc and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

P. Testing of Concrete Anchors:

1. When drilled-in concrete anchors or shot-in anchors are used in reinforced concrete for hanger wires, 1 out of 10 shall be field t
ested for 200-pounds of tension.

2. When drilled-in concrete anchors are used for bracing wires, 1 out of 2 shall be field tested for 440-pounds in tension. Shot-in anchors in concrete are not permitted for bracing wires.

Q. Support of Light Fixtures and Air Terminals: Comply with ASTM C635/C635M.

1. Ceiling suspension systems that support light fixtures, air-ventilation grilles or partitions shall have a classification of heavy-duty.

2. Recessed or drop-in light fixtures and grilles shall be supported directly from the fixture housing to the structure above with a minimum of two 12-gauge wires located at diagonally opposite corners. Fixture support wires may be slightly loose to allow the fixture to seat in the grid system.

3. Fixture shall not be supported from main runners or cross runners if the weight of the fixtures causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability of the ceiling suspension system.

R. Perimeter Trim:

1. Provide in longest lengths available and combinations of lengths to minimize number of joints required.

2. Do not use pieces shorter than 48-inches.

3. Miter joints at corners.

4. Install to neatly close with adjoining vertical surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

B. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

C. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16-inches (400 mm) oc and not more than 3-inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 12-feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

D. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

3.6 INSTALLATION, CEILING TILES
A. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.

B. Install acoustical tile in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim.

Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so that every tile-to-tile joint is closed by double lap of material.

C. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension syst
em runners and moldings.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cutting Tiles:

1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints and to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Scribe and cut for accurate fit at borders and around penetrating work.

2. Trim cut tiles at wall junctures so that tegular edges fit properly into grid and edge moldings. Trim edges of tegular tiles to match edges on untrimmed sides as indicated on Drawings.

3. Cut all ceiling tiles with sharp blade, no rough edges or torn face of tiles will be permitted.

4. Paint all cut edges of tiles with compatible coating to match color of tile surface.

E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.

F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:

1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

G. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints and to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.

Scribe and cut for accurate fit at borders and around penetrating work.

H. Trim cut tiles at wall junctures so that tegular edges fit properly into grid and edge moldings.

Trim edges of tegular tiles to match edges on untrimmed sides as indicated on Drawings.

Paint cut edges to match ceiling tile face.

I. Conform to State safety orders and applicable codes, including the seismic bracing requirements of CBC.

3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hangers as required. Addition of kinks or bends in hangers are not acceptable; take up in ties only.

B. When complete, grid members of each assembly shall be mutually parallel/square, accurately aligned, with joints neatly formed and closely fitted and aligned flush; each assembly shall be securely anchored and braced to structure to prevent movement.

3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage.

B. Exposed surfaces of grids shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, fingerprints, and other defects and damage.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-11
C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evi
dence of damage.

D. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 09 5123
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 5123-12
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 Vapor Emission Treatment System 09 6423-1
SECTION 09 6423 VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCU
MENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Liquid applied one-coat moisture vapor reduction system at basement floor slab where resilient flooring and carpeting finishes are scheduled.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 09 0511 Concrete Floor Preparation.

C. Section 09 0512 - Concrete Floor Moisture Content and pH Testing D. Section 09 6500 Resilient Flooring: Moisture-retardant adhesive used for installation of engineered wood flooring system.

E. Section 09 6813 Tile Carpeting: Plastic sheet vapor retarder under sprung wood flooring system.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Treatment system data, including independent laboratory testing results.

2. Warranty certificate sample.

3. Crack and joint sealing detail or method.

4. Primers used to coat treatment
B. CALGreen Submittals: Provide product data for the following:

1. For CALGreen 5.504.4.3 Finish Material Pollutant Control, Paints and Coatings:

Product data for coatings, including printed statement of chemical composition and VOC content of each product used.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit applicators certificate from manufacturer.

B. Test Reports:

1. ASTM F710 test report before treatment.
a. Maximum pH of 14.

2. ASTM F1869 test reports before and after treatment.
a. Test three locations minimum.
b. Perform 1 additional test at each additional 1000 sq ft of area.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 Vapor Emission Treatment System 09 6423-2
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 CLOS

EOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed copy of special warranty specified in this Section.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Certified by the manufacturer of special coating system and shall provide proof of certification and shall have valid California C-15, C-61 or C-33 contractors license.

B. Manufacturer: Minimum of five (5) years producing specified make, model number, product name and no formulation change.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Products shall meet current local, State and Federal environmental laws.

B. Provide adequate ventilation during application within an enclosed space.

C. Disposal of containers and materials and associated labor costs shall be the responsibility of the applicator.

D. Installed in building climates that are representative of the finished building atmosphere.

Minimum of 65 degrees Fahrenheit or above 50%RH prior to, during and 48 hours after installation process.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Time considerations for process are contingent upon conditions encountered and construction schedule. A minimum of 3 weeks should be considered for extensive work.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Submit 15 year written warranty covering all costs of treatment system products, process controls, replacement of finished flooring and adhesive and associated labor.

B. Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Moisture vapor emission to be less than 3 lbs per 1000 sq. ft per twenty-four hours test per ASTM F1869 after finish installation.

B. Coatings: Meet the following:

1. EPA Method 24 testing of less than 65 g/liter, by independent laboratory testing.

2. Contains no formaldehyde, formaldehyde precursors and zero-carcinogens

3. Contains zero ha
zardous air pollutants (HAPs)

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the concrete vapor emission treatment system is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Basis-of-Design: FloorSeal Technologies

2. Ardex.

3. Maxxon.

B. General: Two-component epoxy based treatment for penetrating dry, damp and wet concrete floor surfaces. Product shall maintain adhesion to concrete containing silicates and resin treatments.

C. Moisture Tolerant Primer: Two-component, non-porous type for chemically bonding cement products to treatment surface.

D. Cement Topcoat: Portland cement, self-leveling cement product meeting a compressive strength of 4,500 psi per ASTM C109/C109M as approved by manufacturer.

E. Joint & Crack Treatment: Two-component epoxy approved by manufacturer.

F. Laboratory Test - Treatment Properties:

1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96/E96M;
a. Grams/h· m² of less than 0.7 (or less)
b. Nanograms/ Pa · s · m² of less than 81.1 (or less)

2. Alkali Resistance 30 days: ASTM D1308
a. Resistant to 35% potassium hydroxide exposure.
b. Resistant to 14pH solution exposure.

3. Concrete Adhesion Pull off Strength
a. ASTM D4541 and ASTM D7234 Adhesion - 100% concrete cohesive failure

4. Environmental Properties
a. EPA Method 24 testing of less than 65 g/liter
b. Contains no formaldehyde, formaldehyde precursors and zero-carcinogens c. Contains zero hazardous air pollutants (HAPs)
d. Meets Section 01350 - California Department of Health Services Standard practice requirements for classroom and office space

5. Water Vapor Emission: ASTM F1869; Capable of restricting water vapor emission of 15 lbs. to a controlled level less than 2.0 lbs.

6. Internal Relative Humidity: ASTM F2170; Tolerant to substrates where relative humidity levels are 100%RH.

7. Alkalinity-pH Tolerance: ASTM F710; Resistant to 14pH exposure PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrates meet manufactures requirements prior to installations.

3.2 P

REPARATION
A. Shot blast concrete surfaces using a #390- #460 shot to prepare concrete. Remove all foreign materials detrimental to treatment, such as curing compounds, silicate sealers, loose patching materials and surface oil and ensure a clean surface profile. Re-shot blast areas where surface debris remains and silicate sealers where previously applied.

B. Vacuum all surfaces to remove dust, debris and shot. Do not acid etch or use clean sweeping agents.

C. Rout out all structural cracks, control joins and cold joints to a 1/4-inch depth minimum.

Vacuum out debris. Thoroughly dig out any features with large, thorough passage into soil substrate, vacuum, and fill with appropriate crack filling material.

D. Acceptable Surface Profile:

1. Absorbent and allows water to penetrate freely without resistance. Slick surfaces from curing compounds and/or release agents must be shot blasted completely off.

2. Perform all required adhesion, core testing, laboratory evaluation and chemical testing of substrate to meet treatment manufactures warranty requirements

3.3 SUBSTRATE COMPLIANCE
A. Apply liquid applied treatment system rated to restrict 100%RH and 14pH at all floor surfaces before flooring products are installed.

3.4 TREATMENT APPLICATION
A. Verify that surfaces are solid, free of loose particles, cracks, pits, rough projections or foreign matter detrimental to maximum adhesion of the treatment.

B. Apply one-coat of treatment over slab surface, cracks, joints and around penetrations at manufacture recommended coverage rates using a lint free roller, notched squeegee or medium bristle floor broom.

C. After coating has sufficiently cured, re-apply second-coat of treatment over all substrate areas to create a uniform surface.

D. Apply crack and joint treatments to maintain treatment warranty.

3.5 CEMENT TOPCOAT APPLICATION (WHERE INDICATED)
A. Allow vapor emission treatment system to cure a minimum of 12 hours at 80°F; 24 hours at 55°F unless permitted otherwise by manufacturer.

B. Apply approved non-porous primer before installing cement products to smooth uneven floor transitions. A non-porous primer must be used to secure cement products. Do not use cement products with special additives as a replacement for a non-porous primer.

C. Use a high-quality patch or Portland cement-based product only. Follow the flooring manufactures recommendations for cement thickness requirements.

E. Final
surfaces shall be smooth and absorbent to allow proper adhesion of primers, adhesives and flooring products.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Maintain trade traffic to protection treatment system and process immediately after completion and until finished flooring system is installed.

END OF SECTION 09 6123
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 Vapor Emission Treatment System 09 6423-6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500-1
SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCU
MENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sheet linoleum flooring.

B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 0511 Concrete Floor Preparation.

B. Section 09 0512 - Concrete Floor Moisture Content and pH Testing C. Section 09 6423 Vapor Emission Treatment System.

1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

B. Install flooring adequately in advance of scheduled occupancy of each Phase of the project to assure proper curing of adhesives prior to allowing foot traffic on flooring.

C. Do not install resilient floor coverings over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by floor covering manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

1. Provide manufacturers' product data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of all seams, whether deviating from seam locations indicated on Drawings or not.

C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150- by-230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.

1. Tile: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 12-inches (300-mm) square samples of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.

2. Sheet: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of resilient sheet flooring required Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500-2

3. Wall Base: For each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.

4. Heat-Wel
ding Bead: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9-inches (230 mm) long, of each color required.

D. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by- 230-mm) Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.

E. CALGreen Submittals: Provide product data for the following:

1. For CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Finish Material Pollutant Control; Adhesives, Sealants, and Caulks: For adhesives, sealants, and caulks, including printed statement of VOC content.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certification: Furnish the following:

1. Confirmation that flooring contractor is authorized by the manufacturer of the resilient flooring for the installation of the product.

2. Confirmation of the planned use of installation tools required by manufacturer of the specific resilient flooring.

3. Confirmation that the subfloor will be prepared to receive resilient flooring, including the use of manufacturers approved leveling compound, as required where subfloor is either not smooth or not level.

4. Certifications of:
a. Mechanics qualifications.
b. Moisture testing.
c. Adhesive testing.

5. Written approval of Job Site conditions by flooring contractor.

6. Evidence of compliance with local air quality standards for resilient flooring and adhesive.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form of each different composition, wearing surface, color, and pattern of sheet flooring material.

2. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.

3. Resilient Base Material: 50 lineal feet of each color and size.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are approved and certified by flooring manufacturer, as well as competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500-3
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Flooring: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring from
a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq.cm or more per ASTM E648.

2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver resilient flooring and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

C. Move flooring and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C).

B. Do not install flooring until it is at the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed.

C. Close spaces to traffic during installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING
A. Sheet Linoleum (RF-1): ASTM F2034; homogeneous sheet linoleum of primarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil, wood flour, and rosin binders, mixed and calendered onto natural jute backing, with pattern and color extending throughout total thickness of material.

1. Basis-of-Design: Forbo Marmoleum.

2. Width: 79-inches.

3. Thickness: 1/10-inch.

4. Slip Resistance: In accordance with ADA recommendation of .6 for flat surfaces in accordance with ASTM D2047.

5. Static Load Limit: ASTM F970, 450 lb/sq in.

6. Fire Resistance:
a. Smoke Density: ASTM E622, 450 or less.

7. Style and Col
or: TBD.

2.2 RUBBER BASE
A. Resilient Wall Base (R-1): ASTM F1861, Type Vinyl (Type TV).

1. Manufacturer: Marmoleum Wall Base.

2. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous).

3. Style: Cove (with top-set toe).

4. Minimum Thickness: 0.125-inch (3.2 mm).

5. Height: 4-inches (102 mm).

6. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length, but not less than 100 feet.

7. Outside Corners: Premolded.

8. Inside Corners: Premolded.

9. Surface: Smooth.

10. Color: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24 and South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168).
a. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L maximum.
b. Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L maximum.

C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.

1. Color: Match floor covering.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective metal, cross-linked acrylic floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas where installation of flooring will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient flooring installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer.

2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Section 03 3000 for slabs receiving resilient flooring.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500-5

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind.

C. Verify
adhesives are compatible with concrete curing compounds on slabs. Where adhesive is found not to be compatible, remove curing compound prior to installation of material.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive flooring.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710.

1. Testing: See Section 09 0512.

2. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

3. Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Where testing indicates concrete does not meet moisture and alkalinity levels required for installation see Section 09 6123 for concrete vapor emission treatment.

C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.

E. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient flooring immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.

F. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.

3.3 LINOLEUM SHEET INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of floor covering installation included in Project.

B. Linoleum must be wet-set in adhesive within 10-15 minutes after application of the adhesive. Do not apply adhesive before linoleum pieces have been properly measured, cut, and prepared for application. Do not apply more adhesive than required for prepared linoleum.

C. Maintain uniformity of linoleum direction. Install one sheet at a time.

D. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6-inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500-6
E. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently
fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. Seal all seams.

F. Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and patterns at seams. Avoid cross seams.

G. Scribe, cut, and fit linoleum to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture, including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.

H. Extended linoleum into spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

I. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

J. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specified adhesive. Spread at rate of approximately 150 sq ft/gallon as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

K. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections.

L. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

M. Hand-roll linoleum in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminated trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument.

3.4 CORK RUBBER TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install rubber tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

2. Lay resilient flooring with arrows in the same direction.

C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.

E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500-7
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repea
ting on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non- staining marking device.

G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. Remove excess adhesive immediately.

H. Do not install defective or damaged resilient tile flooring.

I. Conform to RFCI-TM-6 for joint tightness and for corner intersection unless layout pattern shows random corner intersection. More than 5 percent of the joints not touching or any joint more than 0.0051-inch wide will not be accepted.

3.5 RUBBER BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.

E. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 24-inches between joints.

F. Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. At exposed ends use premolded units.

G. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.

H. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

I. Where base wraps around columns, ensure that seams are terminated with a mitered joint at the corners of the column. Offset, asymmetrical seams on the face of the column are not permissible.

3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Apply contact bond adhesive to the back of the moulding and the wall/floor surface area.

B. When adjoining carpet, trim the carpet so that it fills the undercut area of the moulding completely.

C. Do not perform any maintenance on the product for 24 hours after installation is completed.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500-8

3.7 CLEANING
A. Perform the fol
lowing operations immediately after completing flooring installation:

1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by flooring manufacturers.

2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.

3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.

4. Damp-mop floor to remove black marks and soil.

B. Resilient Accessory Cleaning:

1. Thoroughly sweep or vacuum the entire surface area to remove all loose dirt and grit

2. Scrub the resilient accessory surfaces with a neutral cleaning solution mixture recommended by manufacturer, using a clean cloth or sponge.

3. Rinse with clean cold water and allow the product to thoroughly dry.

C. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Use floor polish product acceptable to flooring manufacturer.

2. Sealer: Apply manufacturers recommended sealer, 1-2 coats.

3. Polish: Apply 2-3 coat(s).

4. Reapply floor polish after cleaning.

B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

Use protection methods indicated or recommended by flooring manufacturer.

C. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over protective panels without moving panels.

D. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09 6500
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILE CARPETING 09 6813-1
SECTION 09 6813 TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Modular, non-indexed, carpet tile.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 0511 Concrete Floor Preparation.

B. Section 09 0512 - Concrete Floor Moisture Content and pH Testing C. Section 09 6423 Vapor Emission Treatment System.

D. Section 09 6500 Resilient Flooring: Resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.

C. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILE CARPETING 09 6813-2

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenanc
e Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

B. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is approved by carpet tile manufacturer and certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements with a minimum of 5 years continuous experience in the installation of the types of carpet tile specified.

B. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Test Method: ASTM E84.

2. Flame Spread: 75 or less.

3. Fire Hazard Classification: Class I floor finish.

4. Minimum critical flux limit of 0.45-watts/square centimeter when tested in accordance with NFPA 253.

C. Static electricity generation of installed carpet shall not exceed 3.5 KV at 70-deg. F and 20- percent R.H. for life of carpet tile.

D. Carpet Tile Low-VOC Emissions: Provide carpet and cushion materials that have been tested and certified to indicate carpet, carpet backings, cushions, and adhesives emit no or low VOCs (volatile organic compounds). Provide products carrying the following certifications:

1. CRI Green Label.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers labels intact until time for use, with seals unbroken and store rolls in a flat position. Protect from damage, dirt, stains and moisture.

C. Do not store carpet tile near products that can off gas harmful substances.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILE CARPETING 09 6813-3

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply
with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

2. Use adhesives in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations, and ventilate area with maximum outside air for a minimum of 48-hours after installation.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

1. Test substrates to ensure that no dusting will occur through installed carpet tile. Apply sealer on porous concrete surfaces where required to prevent dusting.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Available Products (CPT-1): Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Basis of Design: TBD: one of the following:
a. Interface Flooring Systems, Mohawk Group, Shaw Floors.

2. Size: 24x24 tile

3. Style: TBD

4. Collection: TBD

5. Product Number: TBD

6. Color: TBD.

7. Installation Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.

8. Dye Method: 100% solution dyed

9. Backing System: TBD

10. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

11. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

12. Allow for multiple colors and patters as indicated on Drawings.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILE CARPETING 09 6813-4

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable
Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D5116:
a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h.
b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following:

1. Testing: See Section 09 0512.

2. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

4. Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

5. Where testing indicates concrete does not meet moisture and alkalinity levels required for installation see Section 09 6123 for concrete vapor emission treatment.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

1. Mechanically remove existing flooring products

2. Sand smooth
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILE CARPETING 09 6813-5

1. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more
than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 TILE CARPETING 09 6813-6
B. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 09 6813
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission Novembe r 01, 2024
COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-1
ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS SECTION 09 84 00
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general conditi
ons of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Cementitious wood fiber plank acoustical ceiling
& wall system
B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 20 00 Plaster and Gypsum Board

2. Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design
Requirements

3. Section 01 81 19 Indoor Air Quality
Requirements

4. Divisions 23 HVAC Air Distribution

5. Division 26 Electrical
C. Alternates

1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in
the Contract documents, proposed product
substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN
(10) working days prior to the date established for
receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed
substitution is contingent upon the Architects
review of the proposal for acceptability and
approved products will be set forth by the
Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute
products that have not been approved by
Addenda, the specified products shall be provided
without additional compensation.

2. Submittals that do not provide adequate data for
the product evaluation will not be considered.

The proposed substitution must meet all
requirements of this section, including but not
necessarily limited to, the following: Single
source materials suppliers (if specified in Section

1.5); Underwriters Laboratories Classified
Acoustical performance; Panel design, size,
composition, color, and finish; Suspension system
component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method

2. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an
Environmental Chamber

3. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

4. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products B. International Building Code
C. ASHRA E
Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality" D. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.

Tectum DesignArt Lines
Direct-Attach Ceiling & Wall Panels
21D01T10
_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Hatches Lines
21D03T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Arcs Lines
21D04T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Rings Lines
21D05T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Rays Lines
21D06T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Checkers Lines
21D07T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Steps Lines
21D08T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Bands Lines
21D09T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Illusions Lines
21D10T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Decos Lines
21D11T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Currents Lines
21D12T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Strings Lines
21D13T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Droplets Lines
21D14T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Signals Lines
21D15T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Tilts Lines
21D40T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Tilts B Lines
21D41T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Tilts C Lines
21D42T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Tilts D Lines
21D43T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Retro Lines
21D44T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Retro B Lines
21D45T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Rings B Lines
21D46T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Bands B Lines
21D47T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Bands C Lines
21D48T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Illusions B Lines 21D49T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Currents B Lines
21D50T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with String B Lines
21D51T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Droplets B Lines
21D52T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Signals B Lines
21D53T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Contours Lines
21D54T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Levels Lines
Accessories
Item 54
56GAL1_ _ _ - 1 Gallon Touch Up Paint
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-2
E. California Department of Public Health CDPH/EHLB Emission Standard Method Version 1.1 2010 F. L.E.E.D. - Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design is a set of rating systems for the design, construction, operation, and maintenance of green buildings.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Direct attached Ceiling acoustical systems manufactured from domestic cementitious wood fiber.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data for each type of Tectum ® DesignArt - Lines acoustical ceil ing and wall unit required.

B. Samples: Minimum 6-inch x 6-inch samples of specified Tectum DesignArt Lines acoustical ceiling and wall panels.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of Tectum DesignArt - Lines show locations of items that are to be coordinated.

D. Certifications: UL certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. Acoustical performance, products must be tested to the A, D-20, C-20, or C-40 method.

E. Country of Origin: Submittals must be accompanied by letter, label or certification indicating the manufacturing country of origin. Comply with Made in USA requirements as applicable for the project.

F. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriters Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architects or owners discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturers current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.

1.6 SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS
A. Transparency: Manufacture
rs will be given preference when they provide documentation to support sustainable requirements for the following: Material ingredient transparency, Removal of Red List Ingredients per LBCV3, Life Cycle impact information, Low-Emitting Materials, and Clean Air performance.

B. Health Product Declaration. The end use product has a published, complete Health Product Declaration with disclosure at a minimum of 1000ppm of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard.

C. Declare Label. The end use product has a published Declare label by the International Living Future Institute with disclosure of 100 ppm with a designation of Red List Free or Compliant (less than 1% proprietary ingredients).

D. Low Emitting products with VOC emissions data. Preference will also be given to manufacturers that can provide emissions data showing their products meet CDHP Standard Method v1.1 (Section 01350).

E. Life cycle analysis. Products that have communicated lifecycle data through Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) will be preferred.

F. End of Life Programs/Recycling: Where applicable, manufacturers that provide the option for recycling of their products into new products at end-of-life through take-back programs will be preferred.

G. Products meeting LEED V4 requirements including:

1. Storage & Collection of Recyclables

2. Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning

3. Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction

4. Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Environmental Product Declarations

5. Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Sourcing of Raw Materials

6. Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Material Ingredients

7. Construction and Demolition Waste Management

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-3
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical wall components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification.

C. Tectum ® DesignArt - Lines, as with other architectural features located wall, may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern through possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are present.

D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate Tectum DesignArt - Lines work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustic al wall units to project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Provide labels indicating brand name, style, size, and thickness.

C. Before installing acoustical wall units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

D. Handle acoustic al wall units careful
ly to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.

1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environme ntal Requirem
ents:

B. Do not install wall panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.

C. Locate materials onsite at least 24 hours before beginning installation to allow materials to reach temperature and moisture content equilibrium.

D. Maintain the following conditions in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during and after installation:

1. Relative Humidity: 65 - 75%.

2. Uniform Temperature: 55 - 70 degrees F (13 - 21 degrees C).

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Tectum DesignArt - Lines: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not lim ited to the following:

1. Defects in materials or factory workmanship.

B. Tectum DesignArt - Lines one source manufacturer is Thirty (30) years from date of substantial completion.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed.

Packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Tectum DesignArt - Lines Acoustical Ceiling and Wall Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturer
A. Tect
um DesignArt - Lines Ceiling and Wall Panels:

1. Tect um® by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL WALL UNITS
A. Acoustical Panels Type AP-1:

1. Surface Texture: Coarse

2. Composition: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement

3. Color: TBD BY ARCHITECT (Standard Selection: Natural (TNA), Basalt (TBT), Polar (TPO), Oat (TOT), Rainstorm (TRS), Lilac (TLC), Boxwood (TBW), Feldspar (TFS), Rose (TRO), Riverstone (TRS), Lime stone (TLM), Hay (THY),
Pacific (TPC), Twilight (TTT), Fern (TFN), Topaz (TTZ), Honeysuckle (THS), Coffee (TCE), Fossil (TFL), Sandstone (TSS), Mist (TMT), Ocean (TOC), Ivy (TIV), Bronzite (TBZ), Marigold (TMG)

4. Size: 24 x 24 x 1

5. Thickness: 1

6. Edge Profile: Beveled on direct-attach

7. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423 (A-mounting); (Standard NRC 0.40); ASTM C 423 (D-20 mounting) (Standard NRC 0.45); ASTM C 423 (C-20 mounting) (Standard NRC 0.80); ASTM C 423 (C-40 mounting) (Standard NRC 0.85) Classified with UL label.

8. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; (Fire Class A)

9. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus

10. Sustainable: EPD (Environme
ntal Product Declaration) and HPD (Health Product Declaration)

11. USDA Certified Biobased Product, 98%

12. Acceptable Product: Tectum® DesignArt Lines Ceiling and Wall Panels as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries
Standard:

Direct-Attach Ceili
ng & Wall Panels

TBD BY ARCHITECT FROM AVAILABLE OPTIONS
5421D01T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Hatches Lines
5421D03T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Arcs Lines
5421D04T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Rings Lines
5421D05T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Rays Lines
5421D06T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Checkers Lines
5421D07T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Steps Lines
5421D08T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Bands Lines
5421D09T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Illusions Lines 5421D10T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Decos Lines
5421D11T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Currents Lines
5421D12T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Strings Lines
5421D13T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Droplets Lines
5421D14T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Signals Lines
5421D15T10_ _ _ 24 x 24 x 1" Panel with Tilts Lines
5421D40T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Tilts B Lines
5421D41T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Tilts C Lines
5421D42T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Tilts D Lines
5421D43T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Retro Lines
5421D44T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Retro B Lines
5421D45T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Rings B Lines
5421D46T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Bands B Lines
5421D47T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Bands C Lines
5421D48T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Illusions B Lines 5421D49T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Currents B Lines 5421D50T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with String B Lines
5421D51T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Droplets B Lines 5421D52T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Signals B Lines 5421D53T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Contours Lines
5421D54T10_ _ _ 24 x 48 x 1" Panel with Levels Lines
Accessories
Item 5456GAL1_ _ _ - 1 Gallon Touch Up Paint
Item 8187L16 #6 X 1-5/8 Painted Head Sharp Point screws Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-5
Item 8186L16 #6 X 1-5/8 Painted Head Drill Point screws Item 8189L22 2-1/4 Painted Head CMU Screws
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each wall area and establish layout of Tectum DesignArt - Lines units. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Tectum ® DesignArt - Lines system in accordance manufacturers installation instructions. Follow the requirements pf the International Building Code and in accordance with the local building code and the authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace damaged and broken Tectum DesignArt Lines panels.

B. Comply with manufacturers instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove any Tectum DesignArt - Lines products that cannot be successfully cleaned and or repaired. Replace with attic stock or new product to eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 90% CD Plan Check Submission August 29, 2024 COILING DOORS AND GRILLES SECTION 08 3300-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09 8414-1
SECTION 09 8414 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabric-wrapped tackable/acoustical wall panels.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 4100 Architectural Woodwork.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for acoustical wall panels, including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.

1. Show orientation of fabric application, pattern matching, and seams.

2. Show panel sizes and mounting locations.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show intersections with wall base, electrical outlets and switches, thermostats, lighting fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other adjacent work.

D. Samples for Verification: Units of each type of acoustical wall panel indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified for facing materials, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Include samples of installation devices and accessories.

1. Fabric: 12" by 12" samples.

2. Acoustical Core: 12" x 12" sample.

3. Mounting Devices: 12-inch long sample.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of acoustical wall panels certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating acoustical wall panels comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenanc
e Data: For acoustical wall panels and facings to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1. Tackable Wall Panels: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.

1. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Install mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. a. Include intersection at wall and ceiling corner door opening.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing acoustical wall panels similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain acoustical wall panels from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Identify acoustical wall panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture when shipping, storing, and handling.

Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until wet-work, such as concrete and plaster, has been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. Protect panel edges from crushing and impact.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical wall panels until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Do not install acoustical panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.

2. Locate materials onsite at least 24 hours before beginning installation to allow materials to reach temperature and moisture content equilibrium.

3. Maintain the following conditions in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during and after installation:
a. Relative Humidity: 65 - 75%.
b. Uniform Temperature: 55 - 70 degrees F (13 - 21 degrees C).

B. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect acoustical wall panels from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install panels under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

C. Field Measurements: Verify wall surface dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to manufacturers named below.

1. CertainTeed Decoustics or Owens Corning Conwed DesignScape. a. Finish: Factory applied fabric in color to match architects sample B. Fabric: Maharam, Knoll, Guilford of Maine.

2.2 TACKABLE ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
A. Construction, Tackable Panels: Noncombustible and dimensionally stable glass fiber core, 6-7 pcf, laminated with high density acoustically transparent face, resin-hardened edges and connection points, high impact control sheet, and fabric covering.

1. Panel Thickness: 1-1/8-inches.

2. Edges: Square.

3. Corners: Square.

4. NRC: 0.90.

5. Fabric: Manufacturer-approved custom fabric, to be selected by Architect from Maharam or Knoll.
a. Flammability: ASTM E84 Tunnel Test:
1) Flame Spread Rating: Class A, 25 or less.
2) Smoke Developed Rating: 15 or less.

6. Light Reflectance: ASTM C523; using a standard white finish, the average light reflectance value of .82.

7. Sound-Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise reduction coefficients indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM C423 for mounting type specified.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09 8414-4
Thickness Mounting Frequency/Absorption NRC
1 1/8" F (wall) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
.10 .47 .91 1.09 1.08 97 0.90
B. Fabric-Wrapped Acoustical/Tackable Wall Panels: Criteria, sizes, fabrics, composition, mounting method, and fabric
ation requirements to be selected.

C. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing materials to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in fabric weave, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other foreign matter.

1. Fabricate back-mounted panels in factory to exact sizes required to fit wall surfaces, based on field measurements of completed substrates indicated to receive acoustical wall panels.

2. Where square corners are indicated, tailor corners.

3. Where fabrics with directional or repeating patterns, or directional weave, are indicated, mark fabric top and attach fabric in same direction.

4. Where fabric facings with seams are indicated, fabricate invisible seams and comply with Shop Drawings for location.

D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for the following:

1. Thickness.

2. Edge straightness.

3. Overall length and width.

4. Squareness from corner to corner.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Spline-Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard concealed, extruded-aluminum or plastic connecting splines designed and fabricated for screw attachment to walls, with other moldings and trim for interior and exterior corners, leveling and base support, and as required.

Provide panel manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish on exposed items in the following color:

1. Color: Match color of facing material.

B. Back-Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard or recommended accessories for securely mounting panels, of type and size indicated, to substrates provided; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Mechanically Mounted Edge-Reinforced Panels: Metal panel-clip and base-support bracket system consisting of two-part panel clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of panel and the other part to wall substrate, designed to support panels laterally; and base-support brackets designed to support full weight of panels; with both designed to allow for panel removal.

2. Mechanically Mounted Edge-Reinforced Panels: Metal impaling clips designed to support weight of panels, mechanically attached to wall substrate according to panel manufacturer's standard pattern and adhesively bonded to back of panel, with base- support brackets where recommended by manufacturer for additional support of panels.

3. Mechanically Mounted Wood-Framed Panels: Z-clip hanger and magnet system with magnets recessed into frame and designed to engage steel mounting plates that are secured to wall with leveling mastic.

3.1 EXAM

INATION
A. Examine substrates and blocking, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting acoustical wall panel performance.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Cut spline-mounted units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing material extended over cut edge to match uncut edge. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly.

B. Screw head to be flush with panel surface.

C. Securely affix wall panels by means of splines attached vertically to smooth wall or furring strips. Engage vertical kerfs on the edges of the wall panels with splines. Apply adhesive or use Velcro hook and loop fastening where necessary.

D. Cover field cut edges by means of trim or other moldings.

E. Construction Tolerances: As follows:

1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

2. Variation of Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Touch up any minor finish damage.

B. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel, trim, moldings and suspension members to comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

B. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

C. Clean panels with fabric facing, on completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical wall panel installation, on completion of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09 8414-6
E. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Mana
gement and Disposal.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at time of Project Acceptance.

B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Project Acceptance.

END OF SECTION 09 8414
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-1
SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. First-line commercial-quality products for all coating systems.

B. Provide 0-VOC products at interior locations throughout.

C. Surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.

D. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop- priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.

E. Painting exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.

F. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

G. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

H. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturers catalog number and coating material proposed for use.

2. Manufacturers Information: Provide manufacturers technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing and applying each coating material proposed for use.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-2
B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material a
nd application for each coat of each finish sample.

1. Brush-Outs: Submit samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions, on hardboard.
a. Submit 8" by 10" samples of wood finishes on actual wood surfaces; label and identify each as to location and application.
b. Submit 8" by 10" samples of fiber cement finishes on actual fiber cement surfaces; label and identify each as to location and application.

2. Field Samples: Duplicate painted finishes of approved samples on actual wall surfaces and components for approval prior to commencing work.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sf located where approved.
b. Components: One full component as directed.
c. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review.

3. Opaque Colors and Finishes· Submit samples, on hardboard, using materials accepted for Project, of each color and paint finish selected with texture to simulate actual conditions. Prepare three samples, 8-1-1/2 Inches by 11 Inches, with required number of paint coats clearly visible.

4. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Prepare samples on species and quality of wood to be used in the Work. Re-submit as requested until acceptable sheen, color, and texture are achieved. Label and identify each sample as to location and application.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide paint cards fully labeled with manufacturer of each paint system applied on the project. Provide the following with each system:

1. Manufacturer name.

2. Manufacturers paint product.

3. Primer name and number.

4. Color name and number.

5. Gloss level.

6. Locations where used.

B. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

2. Designated paint manufacturer to retain on file the pain formulations of each material and color applied.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-3
B. Field Samples: Apply field sample of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected
to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution prior to commencing work.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Components: One full component as directed.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review.

4. Install field sample using means and methods identical to those that are going to be employed during full production.

5. Allow coating to cure in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

6. Perform adhesion test on existing paint to remain using X-cut method per ASTM D3359. Ratings 4A and 5A acceptable.

7. Final approval of color selections will be based on field sample. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to City.

8. Approval of field sample does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in field sample unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.

Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-4
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

D. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.

E. Do not apply finish in area where dust is generated.

F. Provide lighting level of at least 80 foot-candles, measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which dry erase coating system does not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers for Paint Products: Benjamin Moore, Dunn-Edwards, Kelly-Moore, Sherwin- Williams Co., or approved equal.

B. Manufacturers for High Performance Coating Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Devoe Coatings, Precision Coatings, Inc., Tnemec Company, Inc., or approved equal.

2.2 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Cement Plaster: Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

1. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.

2. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.

B. Selected Metal Fabrications as Indicated, Decorative Metal, and Decorative Metal Railings Indicated to be Painted: High-Performance Finish:

1. Primer: Shop-applied metal primer.

2. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy modified primer.

3. Topcoat: Semi-gloss acrylic polyurethane.

C. Metal Doors and Frames, Flashings, and Other Miscellaneous Metal:

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-5

1. Ferrous Metal: Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Ext
erior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

2. Zinc-Coated Metal: Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

3. Aluminum:
a. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 1) Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes.

D. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

E. Fiber Cement Siding and Trim: waterborne 100% acrylic exterior finish: two finish coats

1. Primer: siding
and trim factory primed, no additional primer. Prime and paint all cut edges

2. Finish: Exterior semigloss acrylic

2.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Gyps um
Board:

1. Typical Walls and Ceilings: 100% Acrylic finish, two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zero VOC/low odor gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster (eggshell) zero VOC/low odor acrylic enamel.

2. Typical Toilet Room and Janitor Closet Walls and Ceilings: 100% Acrylic finish, two finish coats over a primer.
a. General: 100% Acrylic finish, two finish coats over a primer. b. Primer: Interior zero VOC/low odor gypsum board primer. c. Finish Coats: Interior zero VOC/low odor acrylic enamel, semi-gloss.

3. Acrylic Finish: General: 100% Acrylic finish, two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior 100% Acrylic finish.

B. Metal Stairs, Decorative Metal, and Decorative Metal Railings Indicated to be Painted:

1. Primer: Shop-applied metal primer.

2. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy modified primer.

3. Topcoat: Semi-gloss acrylic polyurethane.

C. Metal Doors and Frames Indicated to be Painted, and Other Miscellaneous Metal: Acrylic finish, two finish coats over a primer.

1. Ferrous Metal:
a. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
1) Primer: Interior zero VOC/low odor ferrous-metal primer. 2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss zero VOC/low odor acrylic enamel.

2. Zinc-Coated Metal:
a. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
1) Primer: Interior zero VOC/low odor zinc-coated metal primer. 2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss zero VOC/low odor acrylic enamel.

D. Wood: Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zero VOC/low odor wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-6
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss zero VOC/low odor acrylic enamel.

E. Allow for interior c
olor section of base color and up to five accent colors.

2.4 MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content: Use materials and products that contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.

B. VOC Content: Paints and coatings applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified in Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements.

1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Paint Materials: Provide only paint materials that meet the requirements of Green Seal documents.

D. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Complying with VOC requirements.

E. Interior Colors: As indicated on Drawings.

1. Allow for one base color and up to 5 accent colors.

2.5 PAINT MATERIALS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

C. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

D. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard color designations.

E. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.

4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.

5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-7

6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.

7. Pretreatm
ent Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.

10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

C. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

D. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Wood: 15 percent.

3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

4. Plaster: 12 percent.

E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION, GENERAL
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface- applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

1. Clean room & spaces before commencement of work.

C. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-8
D. Follow proper procedures, methods, guidelines, and regulations for paint preparation related to lead
paint sanding. Wear goggles, NIOSH (National Institute for occupational Safety and Health)-approved respirators, rubber gloves, and appropriate clothing.

E. Clean building exterior using pressurized hot water.

1. Clean heavily soiled areas with fiber brush and water.

2. Equip pressure washer with fan tip nozzle of 250 degree minimum.

3. Do not permit water temperature to exceed 180 degrees F.

4. Do not permit water pressure to exceed 1,200 psi.

F. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.

G. Exposed Equipment: Verify installations are complete before initiating preparation of surfaces of exposed mechanical and electrical piping, conduit, ductwork, and equipment for field-painting.

H. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

I. Factory-Primed and Enamel Substrates: Wipe clean and dry.

J. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

B. Steel Substrates: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) specification SSPC-SP 10 and written instructions of paint manufacturer.

1. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

2. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damages. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

1. Treat exterior galvanized surfaces according to SSPC SP-7 and interior galvanized surfaces to SSPS SP-1.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-9
D. Apply primers to metal surfaces in the field under any of the following circumstances:

1. Where
it can be established that shop primer was applied more than 30 days (7 days for some primers, verify with metal shop) before delivery to the site.

2. If shop-applied primer is contaminated during transport or storage.

3. If salts are deposited from marine fog, road salts, construction dusts, etc. during storage.

E. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. Remove excess build-up of multiple layers of existing paint to restore original profiles to the greatest extent possible.

1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended know sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

2. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, shelving, and cases. a. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.

3. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to project site; prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood.

4. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

F. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

1. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.

2. Treat concrete surfaces which are highly glazed or where traces of form release agents are present with a preparation of one-part concentrated muriatic acid, 4-parts water and one-part detergent or as recommended by parting compound manufacturer. Remove acid with water. Allow to dry.

3. Remove stains on concrete resulting from weathering or corroded metals, with a solution of 2-oz. sodium methasilicate in one-gallon water. Wet stained areas with water before application of solution. Allow to dry.

4. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests.

If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions.

B. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-10
D. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

3.5 AP

PLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

C. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.

D. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

E. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.

1. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats.
a. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected and approved.
b. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of coats applied.

2. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet.

3. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the exposed sides.

F. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

G. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.

Sacramento City CouncilFebruary 4, 2025

Sacramento City Council
February 4, 2025